Lexus GS450H 2013 Owner's Manual

Add to my manuals
860 Pages

advertisement

Lexus GS450H 2013 Owner's Manual | Manualzz

Pictorial index Search by illustration

1

For safety and security

Make sure to read though them

2 Instrument cluster

How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of warning lights and indicators, etc.

3

Operation of each component

Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving, etc.

4 Driving Operations and advices which are necessary for driving

5 Interior features

Usage of the interior features, etc.

6

Maintenance and care

7

When trouble arises

8

Vehicle specifications

Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures

What to do in case of malfunction or emergency

Vehicle specification, customizable features, etc.

For owners

Index

Search by symptom

Search alphabetically

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2 TABLE OF CONTENTS

For your information................................... 8

Reading this manual...................................14

How to search..............................................15

Pictorial index...............................................16

1 For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Before driving................................. 28

For safety drive...............................30

Seat belts.......................................... 32

SRS airbags.....................................38

Front passenger occupant

classification system.................. 49

Safety information

for children ................................... 54

Child restraint systems ............... 55

Installing child restraints............. 59

Exhaust gas precautions............ 69

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features............... 70

Hybrid system precautions........ 74

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system.......................79

Alarm...................................................81

2 Instrument cluster

2.

Instrument cluster

Warning lights

and indicators..............................84

Gauges and meters.....................89

Multi-information display .......... 94

Head-up display.......................... 102

Energy monitor/

consumption screen............... 109

3

Operation of each component

3-1. Key information

Keys....................................................118

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart access system

with push-button start.............. 121

Wireless remote control...........134

Doors................................................137

Trunk................................................... 141

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats...................................... 148

Driving position memory......... 150

Head restraints .............................155

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel............................. 158

Inside rear view mirror ..............159

Outside rear view mirrors......... 161

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows.............................164

Moon roof.......................................167

4 Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle ......................172

Cargo and luggage.................... 183

Vehicle load limits....................... 186

Trailer towing .................................187

Dinghy towing..............................188

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch ............. 189

EV drive mode..............................196

Hybrid transmission................... 199

Turn signal lever..........................205

Parking brake .............................. 207

Brake Hold .................................... 210

Horn ..................................................212

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch ..........................213

Fog light switch ............................ 218

Windshield wipers

and washer ..................................219

Headlight cleaner switch........ 226

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap ......227

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Cruise control............................. 232

Dynamic radar

cruise control............................ 236

LKA

(Lane-Keeping Assist)............251

Intuitive parking assist................ 261

Rear view monitor system....... 274

Driving mode select switch ... 286

Driving assist systems ..............289

PCS

(Pre-Collision System) ......... 296

BSM

(Blind Spot Monitor) .............305

Lexus night view............................311

4-6. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips .......317

Winter driving tips.......................319

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4 TABLE OF CONTENTS

5 Interior features

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch .............................328

Remote Touch screen..............330

Set up screen............................... 336

Voice command system..........353

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Front automatic

air conditioning system......... 364

Rear air conditioning

system...........................................379

Rear window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers..........384

Windshield wiper de-icer.......385

5-3. Using the audio system

Audio system type.....................386

Using the radio ...........................409

Using the CD/DVD player.... 433

Playing an audio CD

and MP3/WMA discs ......... 435

Playing DVD video .....................441

CD/DVD player and DVD

video disc information .......... 453

Listening to

Bluetooth ®

audio ................... 465

Listening to

a USB memory.........................475

Listening to an iPod...................485

Optimal use of

the audio/video system ........ 495

Using the AUX port..................497

Using the rear seat

audio controls...........................498

Using the steering wheel

audio switches..........................503

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone) ................506

Using a Bluetooth ®

phone..... 515

Setting the hands-free system

(for cellular phone) ................534

Setting the Bluetooth

®

............558

5-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ...........................571

• Interior light.............................572

• Personal lights ........................572

5-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features .............574

• Glove box ................................576

• Console box ...........................577

• Cup holders........................... 578

• Auxiliary boxes .....................580

Trunk features............................... 581

5-7. Other interior features

Sun visors

and vanity mirrors...................583

Clock ..............................................584

Ashtrays.........................................585

Power outlets...............................586

Heated steering wheel............588

Seat heaters/

seat ventilators.........................590

Armrest.......................................... 593

Rear sunshade/

rear door sunshades.............. 594

Coat hooks....................................597

Assist grips ...................................598

Utility hook ...................................599

Garage door opener ...............600

Safety Connect........................... 607

6 Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior ..................616

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior.................. 620

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements... 623

General maintenance...............626

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)

programs....................................630

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6 TABLE OF CONTENTS

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions..................................631

Hood...............................................634

Positioning a floor jack.............635

Engine compartment................637

12-volt battery ..............................647

Tires....................................................651

Tire inflation pressure .................661

Wheels........................................... 664

Air conditioning filter ............... 666

Electronic key battery..............668

Checking and replacing

fuses...............................................670

Headlight aim..............................685

Light bulbs .................................... 687

7 When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers .................. 702

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency.... 703

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs

to be towed................................ 704

If you think

something is wrong..................710

If a warning light turns on or

a warning buzzer sounds........ 711

If a warning message

is displayed ..................................721

If you have a flat tire ................... 749

If the hybrid system

will not start ................................ 762

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P......................764

If the parking brake cannot

be released.................................765

If the electronic key does not

operate properly...................... 767

If the 12-volt battery

is discharged..............................770

If your vehicle overheats.......... 774

If the vehicle becomes

stuck..............................................778

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7

8 Vehicle specifications

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) .................. 782

Fuel information...........................792

Tire information........................... 795

8-2. Customization

Customizable features............807

8-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize..........................818

For owners

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners.....................................820

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

(in French)............................................... 821

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

(in French).............................................823

Index

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting) ...............................834

Alphabetical index ................................840

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System

Owner’s Manual” for information regarding the navigation system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8

For your information

Main Owner’s Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system

Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your

Lexus vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:

● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

● Dynamic radar cruise control system

● Cruise control system

● Anti-lock brake system

● Vehicle dynamics integrated management

● SRS airbag system

● Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

9

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

10

Vehicle data recordings

Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:

• Engine speed

• Electric motor speed (traction motor speed)

• Accelerator status

• Brake status

• Vehicle speed

• Shift position

• Hybrid battery (traction battery) status

The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations, sounds or pictures.

● Data usage

Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency

• For use by Lexus in a law suit

• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner

● Usage of data collected through Safety Connect / Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only)

If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Safety Connect / Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

● Disclosure of the EDR data

Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency

• For use by Lexus in a law suit

However, if necessary, Lexus may:

• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance

• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

11

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

12

Scrapping of your Lexus

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

CAUTION

■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

■ General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

13

14

Reading this manual

CAUTION:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to people.

NOTICE:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.

Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order.

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Indicates the component or position being explained.

Means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

How to search

■ Searching by name

• Alphabetical index .........P. 840

■ Searching by installation position

• Pictorial index........................ P. 16

■ Searching by symptom or sound

• What to do if...

(Troubleshooting)............ P. 834

Searching by title

• Table of contents ....................P. 2

15

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

16

Pictorial index

Pictorial index

■ Exterior

1

2

3

The shape of the headlights may differ depending on the grade, etc. (

P. 687)

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 137

Locking/unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 122, 134

Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 164

Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 767

Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 714, 728

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141

Opening from inside the cabin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141

Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 122, 134

Opening by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 768

Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 714, 729

Outside rear view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161

Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161

Folding the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161

Driving position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150

Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 384

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

17

4

5

6

7

Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219

Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 319

To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)

*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 385

Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 618

Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 227

Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 227

Fuel type/fuel tank capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 784

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 651

Tire size/inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 790

Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 319

Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 651

Coping with flat tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 749

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 634

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 634

Engine compartment cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 638

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 785

Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 774

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 728

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

(Replacing method: P. 687, Watts: P. 791)

13

14

10

11

8

9

12

15

Headlights/parking lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

Fog lights

*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 218

Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 205

Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

Stop lights

Brake Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 210

License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

Back-up lights

Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 199

Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

*

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

18

Pictorial index

■ Instrument panel

1

2

3

Power switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 189

Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 189

Emergency stop of the hybrid system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 703

When the hybrid system will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 762

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 742

Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 199

Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 199

Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 704

When the shift lever does not move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 764

Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89

Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 84

When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 711

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

19

10

11

8

9

4

5

6

7

12

13

14

Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 94

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 94

Energy monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 109

When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 721

Parking brake switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 207

Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 207

Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 320

Warning buzzer/message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 721

Turn signal lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 205

Headlight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights. . . . . . . . . . .P. 213

Fog lights

*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 218

Windshield wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219

Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 646

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 739

Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 702

Trunk opener. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141

Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 634

Tilt and telescopic steering control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158

Driving position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150

Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 364

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 364

Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 384

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 386

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 386

Hands-free system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 506

Trunk opener main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 142

*

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

20

Pictorial index

■ Switches

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

2

1 Headlight cleaner switch

*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 226

VSC OFF switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 291

Instrument panel light control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 91

Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 91

HUD (Head-up display) switches

*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 102

Heated steering wheel switch

*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 588

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch

*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 305

Lexus night view switch

*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 311

Brake hold switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 210

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

21

7

8

5

6

3

4

2

1

Driving position memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150

Outside rear view mirror switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161

Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 137

Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 164

Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 164

PCS OFF switch

*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 297

Tire pressure warning reset switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 654

AFS OFF switch

*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 215

*

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

22

Pictorial index

7

8

5

6

3

4

2

1

9

10

Audio remote control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 503

Paddle shift switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201

Back switch

*

1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 353

Talk switch

*

1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 353

Telephone switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 507

“DISP” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 95

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button

*

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 239

Cruise control switch

Cruise control

*

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 232

Dynamic radar cruise control

*

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 236

Tilt and telescopic steering control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158

LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) switch

*

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 253

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

23

5

6

7

3

4

2

1 Seat heater switches

*

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 590

Seat ventilator switches

*

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 591

Intuitive parking assist switch

*

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 261

Rear sunshade switch

*

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 594

Driving mode select switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 286

EV drive mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 196

Snow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 200

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

*

1 : Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

*

2 : If equipped

24

Pictorial index

■ Interior

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

2

1

SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 38

Floor mats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 28

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 148

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 155

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 32

Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 577

Inside lock buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 137

Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 578

Auxiliary boxes

Ashtrays

*

1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 580

*

1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 585

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

25

7

8

5

6

3

4

2

1

Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 159

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 583

Vanity mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 583

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 572

Personal lights

*

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 572

Moon roof switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 167

“SOS” button

*

1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 607

Garage door opener switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 600

*

1 : If equipped

*

2 : The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

26

Pictorial index

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

1

1-1. For safe use

Before driving.................................28

For safety drive...............................30

Seat belts .......................................... 32

SRS airbags .....................................38

Front passenger occupant

classification system.................. 49

Safety information

for children....................................54

Child restraint systems ...............55

Installing child restraints.............59

Exhaust gas precautions............ 69

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features............... 70

Hybrid system precautions........74

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system ...................... 79

Alarm .................................................. 81

27

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

28

1-1. For safe use

Before driving

Floor mat

1

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets.

2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

*

: Always align the marks.

*

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

29

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to an accident, or leading to death or a serious injury.

■ When installing the driver’s floor mat

● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.

● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.

● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.

● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

■ Before driving

● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.

● With the hybrid system stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

30

1-1. For safe use

For safety drive

For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving.

4

1

2

Correct driving posture

3

Adjust the angle of the seatback so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (

P. 148)

Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (

P. 148)

Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (

P. 155)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

(

P. 32)

Correct use of the seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (

P. 32)

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (

P. 55)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Adjusting the mirrors

Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. (

P. 159, 161)

31

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.

● Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.

Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

32

1-1. For safe use

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts

● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

● Do not twist the seat belt.

1

2

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.

To release the seat belt, press the release button.

Release button

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

1

2

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)

Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button.

Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up.

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

Seat belt comfort guide (outboard rear seats)

For children or smaller-than-average people, slide the seat belt comfort guide forward so that the shoulder belt does not sit close to the person’s neck.

33

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

34

1-1. For safe use

Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision.

The front seat pretensioners also activate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe side collision.

The pretensioner does not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact, a rear impact or a vehicle rollover.

Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)

If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.

(

P. 296)

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (

P. 59)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

35

■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (

P. 55)

● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (

P. 32)

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.

1

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■ Wearing a seat belt

● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

● Always wear a seat belt properly.

● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.

● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary.

The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

36

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (

P. 32)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (

P. 32)

■ When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■ Seat belt pretensioners

If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.

■ Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

(

P. 33)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

37

CAUTION

■ Seat belt damage and wear

● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.

Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.

Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.

■ Using a seat belt extender

● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

1

NOTICE

■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

38

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants.

They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

39

◆ SRS front airbags

2

1

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components

SRS knee airbags

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

An SRS knee airbag for the front passenger’s seat is built into the glove box door.

◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags

4

3

SRS front side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

SRS rear side airbags

Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats

SRS curtain shield airbags

Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

40

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbag system components

1

2

4

6

7

3

5

8

Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)

Side impact sensors (front doors)

Knee airbags

Front passenger airbag

Curtain shield airbags

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator lights

Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters

Side impact sensors (front)

9

10

11

Front side airbags

SRS warning light

Driver airbag

Rear side airbags

12

13

14

15

Side impact sensors (rear)

Driver’s seat position sensor

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Airbag sensor assembly

16

17

18

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

Front impact sensors

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information.

As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

41

1

CAUTION

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

42

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION

■ SRS airbag precautions

● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the

SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (

P. 55)

● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

CAUTION

■ SRS airbag precautions

● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the

SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

● Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

1-1. For safe use

43

1

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seats toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad, lower portion of the instrument panel and door of the glove box.

These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

44

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION

■ SRS airbag precautions

● Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield glass, side door glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.

● Do not hang coat hangers or hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.

● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.

● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components.

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad, door of the glove box and front and rear pillar garnishes are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

45

CAUTION

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy

(inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, glove box, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment

● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or kangaroo bar etc.)

● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system

● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players

● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

1

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)

SRS airbag.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the seats, the glove box, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The windshield may crack.

● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (

P. 607)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

46

1-1. For safe use

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph

[20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact

• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck

● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.

● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.

(

P. 49)

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).

● The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

● Landing hard or falling

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

47

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

● Collision from the side

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

1

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

● Collision from the front

*

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

*

: Depending on the conditions and type of accident, the curtain shield airbags may deploy (inflate) upon frontal impact.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

48

1-1. For safe use

■ When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your

Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the

SRS airbags to inflate.

● A portion of a door is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag, lower portion of the instrument panel or door of the glove box is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Front passenger occupant classification system

49

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.

1

1

2

4

3

Seat belt reminder light

SRS warning light

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

50

1-1. For safe use

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

■ Adult

*

1

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

“AIR BAG ON”

Off

Flashing

*

2

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Activated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

■ Child

*

3

or child restraint system

*

4

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

“AIR BAG

OFF”

Off

*

5

Flashing

*

2

Deactivated

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

■ Unoccupied

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

■ There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

“AIR BAG OFF”

Off

Deactivated

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

“AIR BAG OFF”

On

Deactivated

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

51

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

52

1-1. For safe use

*

1

: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*

2

: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt

*

3

: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

*

4

: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (

P. 55)

*

5

: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. (

P. 59)

CAUTION

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Wear the seat belt properly.

● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the passenger may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.

● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pockets or armrest).

● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

53

CAUTION

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (

P. 59)

● Do not modify or remove the front seats.

● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

54

1-1. For safe use

Safety information for children

Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.

● Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally.

● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.

CAUTION

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

55

Child restraint systems

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.

● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.

● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (

P. 59)

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

56

1-1. For safe use

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child:

Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat

Forward facing  Convertible seat

Booster seat

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (

P. 32)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

57

CAUTION

■ Child restraint precautions

● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.

● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.

In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of an accident.

● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the

SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

58

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION

■ When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■ When the child restraint system is not in use

● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.

Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.

● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.

Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the outboard rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

59

1

Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/

ELR belts except driver’s seat belt)

(

P. 34)

Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

An anchor bracket is provided for each rear seat.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

60

1-1. For safe use

1

Installation with LATCH system

Remove the head restraint.

2 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

Type A

3 Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3

Type B

Latch the buckles onto the

LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

1-1. For safe use

61

1

Canada only

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

62

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

■ Rear-facing  Infant seat/convertible seat

1 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

2 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle.

Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

3 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Forward-facing Convertible seat

1 Rear outboard seats:

Remove the head restraint.

1-1. For safe use

63

1

2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

64

1-1. For safe use

3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle.

Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

5

6

While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (

P. 66)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

■ Booster seat

1 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

1-1. For safe use

65

1

2 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (

P. 32)

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

66

1-1. For safe use

1

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap

Rear outboard seats:

Remove the head restraint.

2 Secure the child restraint system using the seat belt or LATCH anchors.

3 Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION

■ When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (

P. 34)

■ When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden braking or an accident.

● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

● Only put a forward-facing child restraint system on the front seat when unavoidable.

When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy

(inflate).

67

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

68

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION

■ When installing a child restraint system

● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or a sudden braking.

● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.

● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.

Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking or an accident.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

69

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhale.

CAUTION

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ Important points while driving

● Keep the trunk lid closed.

● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ When parking

● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the hybrid system.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

■ Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer.

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

70

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features

Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate with care.

The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.

2

1

Gasoline engine

Electric motor (traction motor)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-2. Hybrid system

◆ When stopped/during start off

The gasoline engine stops when the vehicle is stopped. During start off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped and the electric motor (traction motor) is used.

71

◆ During normal driving

The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery) as necessary.

◆ When accelerating sharply

When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor).

◆ When braking (regenerative braking)

The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery).

1

Vehicle proximity notification system

When driving with the gasoline engine stopped, a sound, which changes in accordance with the driving speed, will be played in order to warn people nearby of the vehicle’s approach. The sound will stop when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

72

1-2. Hybrid system

■ Regenerative braking

In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery).

● The accelerator pedal is released while driving with the shift position in D or S.

● The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift position in D or S.

■ EV indicator

The EV indicator comes on when driving the vehicle using only the electric motor (traction motor).

■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop

The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions:

● During gasoline engine warm-up

● During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging

● When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low

● When the heater is switched on

■ Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

● As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or

10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery becomes fully discharged and you are unable to jump-start the vehicle with the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer.

● If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged.

Always put the shift lever in P when the vehicle is stopped. When driving in heavy traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in D or S to avoid discharging the battery.

■ Charging the 12-volt battery

P. 771

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-2. Hybrid system

73

■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged or has been changed or removed

The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid battery

(traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move.

For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure to shift the shift position to P when parked.

The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating and are not a malfunction:

● Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.

● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear seats when the hybrid system starts or stops.

● Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the trunk lid is open.

● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid transmission when the hybrid system starts or stops.

● Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.

● Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is depressed.

● Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.

● Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vents on the both sides of the rear seatback.

■ Vehicle proximity notification system

In the following cases, the vehicle proximity notification system may be difficult for surrounding people to hear.

● In very noisy areas

● In the wind or the rain

Also, as the vehicle proximity notification system is installed on the front of the vehicle, it may be more difficult to hear from the rear of the vehicle compared to the front.

■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal

Contact your Lexus dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal.

Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. on/off operation of the EV indicator) can be changed.

(Customizable features

P. 807)

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

74

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid system precautions

Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high voltage system (about 650 V at maximum) as well as parts that become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle.

1

2

4

3

Caution label

Power control unit

Electric motor (traction motor)

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

6

7

5

Service plug

High voltage cables (orange)

Air conditioning compressor

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents

There are air intake vents on the both sides of the rear seatback for the purpose of cooling the hybrid battery (traction battery). If the vents become blocked, the hybrid battery may overheat, leading to a reduction in hybrid battery output.

1-2. Hybrid system

75

Emergency shut off system

When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer.

Hybrid warning message

A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.

If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. (

 P. 721)

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

76

1-2. Hybrid system

■ If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If the

“READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Running out of fuel

When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light

(

P. 714) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be

able to start. (The minimum amount of fuel to add to make the low fuel level warning light go out is about 2.6 gal. [10.0 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.], when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope.)

■ Electromagnetic waves

● High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.

● Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio parts.

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)

The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and driving conditions.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-2. Hybrid system

77

CAUTION

■ High voltage precautions

The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury.

● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or their connectors.

● The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage.

Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle.

● Never try to open the service plug access hole located behind the rear seats. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage.

1

■ Road accident cautions

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:

● Pull your vehicle off the road, apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, and turn the hybrid system off.

● Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors.

● If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.

● If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.

● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous.

● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with rear wheels raised. If the wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause an electricity leakage leading to a fire. (

P. 704)

● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

78

1-2. Hybrid system

CAUTION

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)

● Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. Never resell, hand over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through Lexus dealer. Do not dispose of the battery yourself.

Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in death or serious injury:

• The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and it is hazardous to the environment or someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock.

• The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle.

If the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way, accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explosion and electrolyte leakage may occur.

When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of these dangers.

● If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Lexus dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Hybrid battery air vents

● Do not put foreign objects near the air vents. The hybrid battery (traction battery) may overheat and be damaged.

● Clean the air vents regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from overheating.

● Do not wet or allow foreign substances to enter the air vents as this may cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).

● Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system

The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The indicator light flashes after the power switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after the power switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.

79

1

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.

■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object

● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

80

1-3. Theft deterrent system

■ Certifications for the immobilizer system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION

■ Certifications for the immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-3. Theft deterrent system

81

Alarm

The alarm

The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected.

The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:

● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key.

(The doors will lock again automatically.)

● The hood is opened.

Setting the alarm system

Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all the doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.

The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

Deactivating or stopping the alarm

Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:

● Unlock the doors or open the trunk.

● Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or start the hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

82

1-3. Theft deterrent system

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

■ Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:

● Nobody is in the vehicle.

● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.

● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

■ Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:

(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)

● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood.

● The 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. (

P. 772)

■ Alarm-operated door lock

When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent intruders.

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

2

2.

Instrument cluster

Warning lights

and indicators..............................84

Gauges and meters.....................89

Multi-information display .......... 94

Head-up display.......................... 102

Energy monitor/

consumption screen ...............109

83

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

84

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all warning lights and indicators illuminated.

◆ Instrument cluster

The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depending on the target region.

◆ Center panel

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

85

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems.

(U.S.A.)

*

*

1

1

*

1, 2

Brake system warning light

(

P. 711)

(if equipped)

*

1, 2

Brake system warning light

(

P. 711)

“AFS OFF” indicator

(

P. 713)

Brake hold operated indicator (

P. 713)

(Canada)

(U.S.A.)

*

*

*

1

1

1

Charging system warning light (

P. 712)

*

2

(U.S.A.)

*

2

Malfunction indicator lamp (

P. 712)

Malfunction indicator lamp (

P. 712)

(Canada)

*

1

Parking brake indicator

(

 P. 713)

Parking brake indicator

(

P. 713)

Brake system warning light

(

P. 714)

(Canada)

*

1 SRS warning light

(

P. 712)

(

Open door warning light

P. 714)

2

(U.S.A.)

*

1

*

1

ABS warning light

(

P. 712)

ABS warning light

(

P. 712)

(Canada)

* 1

Electric power steering system warning light

(

P. 712)

Low fuel level warning light

(

P. 714)

Seat belt reminder light

(

P. 714)

* 1 Master warning light

(

P. 714)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

86

2. Instrument cluster

*

1, 2

“PCS” warning light

(

P. 712, 726)

(if equipped)

*

1

Slip indicator (

P. 713)

*

1

Tire pressure warning light

(

P. 715)

*

1 : These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

*

2 : The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

87

Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Turn signal indicator

(

P. 205)

(if equipped)

Headlight indicator

(

P. 213)

(if equipped)

Tail light indicator

(

P. 213)

*

Headlight high beam indicator (

P. 214)

(if equipped)

*

1, 2

1

LKA (Lane-Keeping

Assist) indicator

(

P. 251)

Intuitive parking assist indicator (

P. 261)

“AFS OFF” indicator

(

P. 215)

Slip indicator

(

P. 291)

2

(if equipped)

Front fog light indicator

(

P. 218)

(

“READY” indicator

P. 189)

*

1, 3

“PCS” warning light

(

P. 297)

(if equipped)

Parking brake indicator

(

 P. 207)

EV indicator (

P. 72)

(U.S.A.)

Cruise control indicator

(

P. 232, 236)

Radar cruise control indicator (

P. 236)

(Canada)

*

1

(

Parking brake indicator

P. 207)

Brake hold standby indicator (

P. 210)

(if equipped)

*

1 VSC OFF indicator

(

P. 291)

Cruise control “SET” indicator (

P. 232, 236)

*

1 Brake hold operated indicator (

P. 210)

*

1

“AIR BAG ON/

OFF” indicator

(

P. 49)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

88

2. Instrument cluster

*

1

: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

*

2

: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

*

3

: The light comes on when the system is turned off. The light flashes faster than usual to indicate that the system is operating.

CAUTION

■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

When driving mode is in other than sport mode (

P. 286)

89

2

When driving mode is in sport mode (

P. 286)

The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target region.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

90

2. Instrument cluster

1

2

4

6

7

3

5

8

9

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

Hybrid System Indicator

Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (

P. 72)

ECO lamp and SPORT lamp

Changes colors or brightness according to driving mode or way of driving

(

P. 93)

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (

P. 94)

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Shift position and shift range

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (

P. 199)

Odometer and trip meter display

Odometer:

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven

Trip meter:

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset.

Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Changing the display

Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the button will reset the trip meter.

2. Instrument cluster

91

2

Instrument panel light control

2

1

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

Darker

Brighter

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

92

2. Instrument cluster

■ The meters and display illuminate when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■ Instrument panel brightness adjustment

The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be adjusted individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on the tail lights will not change the instrument panel brightness. At this time, any adjustments made to the instrument panel brightness levels will be applied to both settings at once.

■ Limitation of brightness adjustment

The brightness of the instrument panel lights is automatically adjusted based on the light sensor detecting how bright the surroundings are. However, if the instrument panel brightness has been manually set to either the brightest or darkest setting, the automatic adjustment will not be performed.

■ Hybrid System Indicator

1

Charge area

2

3

4

Shows regenerative charging.

Hybrid Eco area

Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often.

The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions.

Eco area

Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an

Eco-friendly manner.

Power area

Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.)

● Hybrid System Indicator is displayed when the driving mode is other than the sport mode.

● By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.

● Charge area indicates regeneration charge the battery.

*

status. Regenerated energy will be used to

*

: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

93

■ ECO lamp and SPORT lamp

● When sport mode is selected, SPORT lamp (red) will illuminate.

● When all of the following conditions are satisfied and Eco-friendly driving, ECO lamp (blue) will illuminate. (ECO lamp will become brighter the more Eco-friendly driving you perform. Also, while the vehicle is stopped or the acceleration exceeds

Zone of Eco driving, ECO lamp turns off. (

P. 92) However, when Eco drive

mode is selected, while the vehicle is stopped or the acceleration exceeds Zone of

Eco driving, ECO lamp does not turn off.):

• Driving with the shift lever in D

• Paddle shift switch is not operated.

• Either normal mode or Eco drive mode is selected.

• The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or below.

■ Tachometer

Hybrid System Indicator switches to the tachometer when driving mode is in sport mode.

■ Engine speed

On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc.

There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. on/off operation of ECO lamp) can be changed.

(Customizable features

P. 807)

2

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components

● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.

● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (

P. 774)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

94

2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display

Display contents

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data including the current outside air temperature.

● Energy monitor (

P. 110)

● Outside temperature display

(

P. 95)

● Trip information (

P. 95)

Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising related information

● Tire inflation pressure

(if equipped) (

P. 661)

● Drive monitor (

P. 97)

● Intuitive parking assist display

*

(if equipped) (

P. 263)

● Dynamic radar cruise control display

*

(if equipped) (

P. 236)

● LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) display

*

(if equipped) (

P. 255)

● Warning messages (

P. 721)

Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems. Display can be switched by pressing the “DISP” button. (

P. 95)

*

: Automatically displayed when the system is used. Display can be switched by pressing the “DISP” button.

(

P. 95)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Trip information

Switching the display

Items displayed can be switched by pressing the “DISP” button.

2. Instrument cluster

95

Energy monitor

P. 110

■ Outside temperature

Displays the outside air temperature

The temperature range that can be displayed is from

-40 F (-40C) to 122F (50C)

■ Current fuel consumption

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption

2

Average fuel consumption after refueling

Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

96

2. Instrument cluster

■ Average fuel consumption

Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset

• The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP” button for longer than 1 second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.

• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

Average vehicle speed

Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset

The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP” button for longer than 1 second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.

■ Driving range

Displays the estimated approximate distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining

• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

When refueling, turn the power switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the power switch off, the display may not be updated.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

97

■ Tire inflation pressure (if equipped)

Displays inflation pressure of each tire

The inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be displayed

Drive monitor

Outside temperature, average fuel consumption after refueling or driving range can be selected and displayed.

If displayed on the drive monitor, other trip information or warning messages can be displayed simultaneously.

For display and selection procedures, follow the “Setting up the displays”.

The information displayed on the drive monitor will not be displayed on the trip information screen.

2

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

98

2. Instrument cluster

1

Setting up the displays

While the vehicle is stopped, press the “DISP” button until the

“Settings” screen appears.

2 Press and hold the “DISP” button until the screen changes.

3 Press and hold the “DISP” button after selecting the desired setting item by pressing the “DISP” button.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4 Press and hold the “DISP” button after selecting the desired setting by pressing the “DISP” button.

2. Instrument cluster

99

5 Press and hold the “DISP” button after selecting the “EXIT” by pressing the “DISP” button.

(The display goes back to step 1 automatically in few seconds without

2

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

100

2. Instrument cluster

■ System check display

After turning the power switch to ON mode, “SYSTEM CHECK” is displayed while system operation is checked.

■ Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change.

● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])

● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

■ Setting display automatic cancelation

In the following situations, setting display in which the settings can be changed through the “DISP” button will automatically be turned off.

● When a warning message appears while the setting display is displayed

● When the vehicle begins to move while the setting display is displayed

■ Tire inflation pressure (if equipped)

● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the power switch is turned to ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.

● “---” may be displayed if the tire information cannot be determined due to unfavorable radio wave conditions.

● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.

■ Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

■ Customization

Setting of available languages can be changed. (Customizable features

P. 807)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

101

CAUTION

■ The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.

■ Cautions during setting up the display

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

2

NOTICE

■ During setting up the display

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while setting up the display features.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

102

2. Instrument cluster

Head-up display

Summary of functions

4

2

1

The head-up display can be used to project vehicle speed and other information onto the windshield.

Head-up display

Display brightness will change automatically according to the brightness of the surrounding area.

“HUD” button

3

Display brightness adjustment switch

5

Display brightness can be adjusted to the desired level.

Display position adjustment switch

“DISP” button

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

103

Head-up display contents

● Vehicle speed

● Hybrid System Indicator (

P. 106)

● Tachometer

● Shift position and shift range

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (

P. 199)

● Audio display

Displays audio information for approximately 3 seconds when the audio system is operated

● Route guidance display (vehicles with navigation system)

(

P. 107)

When approaching an intersection while the navigation system is giving route guidance, an arrow will automatically be displayed to indicate the direction of travel.

● Lane departure warning display (LKA [Lane-Keeping Assist])

(if equipped) (

P. 736)

● Approach warning display (dynamic radar cruise control)

(if equipped) (

P. 735)

● Pre-collision braking warning message (pre-collision system)

(if equipped) (

P. 723)

2

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

104

2. Instrument cluster

Switching the head-up display

“HUD” button

Pressing the switch turns the head-up display on/off and changes the vehicle speed display units as follows:

U.S.A.

OFF  ON (MPH) 

ON (km/h)  OFF

Canada

OFF  ON (km/h) 

ON (MPH)  OFF

■ “DISP” button

Pressing the button changes the display items (except vehicle speed).

2

1

Off

Hybrid System Indicator

3

Tachometer

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

105

Making the display easier to see

Adjusting the display position

1

Higher

2

Lower

Setting the brightness

The brightness of the display is automatically adjusted in accordance with the brightness of the surrounding environment. However, the brightness can also be manually adjusted in 9 stages.

2

1

Brighter

Darker

2

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

106

2. Instrument cluster

4

1

2

Hybrid System Indicator

3

Charge area

Shows regenerative charging.

Hybrid Eco area

Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often.

The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions.

Eco area

Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.

Power area

Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

Route guidance display (vehicles with navigation system)

When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the direction the vehicle should go is guided by the arrow.

When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the route guidance will start and the distance* to the intersection will also be displayed.

* : The distance decreases in increments of 164 ft. (50 m) and the distance indication will disappear when the vehicle passes through the intersection.

Display customization

1

The audio display can be shown or hidden.

Press and hold the “DISP” button until the screen changes.

Customization can be performed when the head-up display is on and the vehicle is traveling at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

2 Press the “DISP” button to switch between on and off.

On and off will be switched between each time the button is pressed.

If the button is left alone without being operated for a short time, setting will be finished automatically.

107

2

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

108

2. Instrument cluster

■ Head-up display

● The head-up display may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses, especially polarized sunglasses.

Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.

● When the head-up display is turned off, it will remain off even if the power switch is turned to ON mode after the power switch has been turned off.

■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The customize settings of the head-up display will be reset.

CAUTION

■ Before using the head-up display

Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not interfere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image’s position or brightness may obstruct the driver’s view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to components

● Do not place any drinks near the head-up display projector. If the projector gets wet, electrical malfunctions may result.

● Do not place anything on or put stickers onto the head-up display projector.

Doing so could interrupt head-up display indications.

● Do not touch the inside of the head-up display projector or thrust sharp edges or the like into the projector.

Doing so could cause mechanical malfunctions.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

Energy monitor/consumption screen

109

You can view the status of your hybrid system on the multi-information display and the Remote Touch screen.

1

2

4

3

Multi-information display

Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch knob

“MENU” button

2

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

110

2. Instrument cluster

Energy monitor

Remote Touch screen

Vehicles without a navigation system

1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.

2 Select “Info” on the “Menu” screen.

If the “Trip Information” or “Past

Record” screen is displayed, select

“Energy”.

Vehicles with a navigation system

1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.

2 Select “Info/Apps” on the

“Menu” screen.

3 Select “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen.

If the “Trip Information” or “Past

Record” screen is displayed, select

“Energy”.

The “Energy Monitor” screen can be displayed on the “Side Display”.

For details, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

■ Multi-information display

Press the “DISP” button on the steering wheel several times to select the energy monitor display.

2. Instrument cluster

111

2

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

112

2. Instrument cluster

When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor

(traction motor)

When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor (traction motor)

When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine

Remote Touch screen Multi-information display

When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

When there is no energy flow

Hybrid battery (traction battery) status

Low Full Low Full

These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

113

Consumption

Vehicles with a navigation system: The consumption screen can be displayed on the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the “Navigation System

Owner’s Manual”.

Vehicles without a navigation system

1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info” on the “Menu” screen.

2 If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, select “Fuel Consumption”.

Vehicles with a navigation system

1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info/

Apps” on the “Menu” screen.

2 Select “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen.

3 If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, select “Fuel Consumption”.

2

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

114

2. Instrument cluster

■ Trip information

If the “Past Record” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information”.

2

1

Resetting the consumption data

Fuel consumption in the past

15 minutes

3

Regenerated energy in the past 15 minutes

One symbol indicates 50 Wh.

Up to 5 symbols are shown.

4

5

6

Displays the average vehicle speed since the hybrid system was started.

Displays the elapsed time since the hybrid system was started.

Cruising range (

P. 115)

Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past averages and averages attained since the power switch was last turned to ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

■ Past record

If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “Past Record”.

1

Updating the average fuel consumption data

2

3

Resetting the past record data

Best recorded fuel consumption

4

5

Average fuel consumption

Previous fuel consumption record

The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated.

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

115

2

■ Updating the past record data

Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current fuel consumption again.

■ Resetting the data

The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.

■ Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.

As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

116

2. Instrument cluster

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

3

3-1. Key information

Keys ....................................................118

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart access system

with push-button start..............121

Wireless remote control .......... 134

Doors ................................................137

Trunk...................................................141

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats...................................... 148

Driving position memory.........150

Head restraints ............................ 155

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel .............................158

Inside rear view mirror.............. 159

Outside rear view mirrors......... 161

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows............................ 164

Moon roof.......................................167

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

117

118

Keys

3-1. Key information

The keys

1

2

3

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart access system with push-button start (

P. 121)

• Operating the wireless remote control function (

P. 134)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

Using the mechanical key

To take out the mechanical key, push the release button and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it.

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key.

(

P. 767)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-1. Key information

119

■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant

Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (

P. 142, 576)

Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.

■ If you lose your mechanical keys

New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

■ When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

120

3-1. Key information

NOTICE

■ To prevent key damage

● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.

● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.

● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.

● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.

● Do not disassemble the keys.

● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.

● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as lowfrequency therapy equipment.

■ Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

■ In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other keyrelated problems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your

Lexus dealer.

■ When an electronic key is lost

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly.

Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was provided with your vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart access system with push-button start

121

Function summary

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

3

1

2

3

Locks and unlocks the doors (

P. 122)

Opens the trunk (

P. 122)

Starts the hybrid system (

P. 189)

■ Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

■ Welcome light illumination control

The side marker, parking, tail and license plate lights automatically turn on at night when the doors are unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if the light switch is in the “AUTO” position.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

122

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Unlocking and locking the doors

Grip the driver’s door handle to unlock the door. Grip the passenger’s door handle to unlock all the doors.*

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for

3 seconds after the doors are locked.

*

: The door unlock settings can be changed. (

P. 126)

Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part of the door handle) to lock all the doors.

Opening the trunk

Press the button.

If the vehicle is equipped with power trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid automatically opens fully.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Antenna location and effective range

Antenna location

1

Antennas outside the cabin

2

Antennas inside the cabin

3

Antenna outside the trunk

34

Antenna inside the trunk

123

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

124

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about

2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door handle. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)

When opening the trunk

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about

2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release button.

When starting the hybrid system or changing power switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door handle

If the door will not lock even when the topside sensor area is touched, try touching both the topside and underside sensor areas at the same time.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

125

■ Alarms and warning indicators

An alarm sounds and warning message displays shown on the multi-information display are used to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take appropriate measures based on the displayed message. (

P. 721)

When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows.

Alarm Correction procedure

Exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds

Interior alarm sounds continuously

Situation

The trunk was closed while the electronic key was still inside the trunk and all the doors were locked.

An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.

The power switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver’s door was open (or the driver’s door was opened while the power switch was in ACCESSORY mode).

Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.

Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.

Turn the power switch off and close the driver’s door.

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

126

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.

1

2

Turn the power switch off.

When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding

,

.

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,

Multi-information display

Unlocking function Beep

Holding the driver’s door handle unlocks only the driver’s door.

Holding a passenger’s door handle unlocks all the doors.

Exterior: Beeps 3 times

Interior: Pings once

Holding a door handle unlocks all the doors.

Exterior: Beeps twice

Interior: Pings once

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (

P. 81)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

127

■ Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time.

● In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may take some time to unlock the doors.

• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.

• The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or longer.

● If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

■ Electronic Key battery-Saving Function

When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing and holding

. Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart access system with push-button start cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

128

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping:

P. 767)

● When the electronic key battery is depleted

● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

• Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby

● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves

• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)

• Digital audio players

• Portable game systems

● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

129

■ Note for the entry function

● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.

• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is opened.

• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is started or power switch modes are changed.

● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.

● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.

● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

130

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Note for locking the doors

● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.

● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle.

(Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (

P. 127)

● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor on the lower part of the door handle.

● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.

■ Note for the unlocking function

● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.

● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle.

(Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (

P. 127)

● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

131

■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.

● The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.

(

P. 807)

■ Alarm

Using the smart access system with push-button start to lock the doors will set the alarm system. (

P. 81)

■ To operate the system properly

● Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

● Do not leave the electronic key inside the luggage compartment.

The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on the location of the key (close to a spare tire, the inside edge of the luggage compartment), conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the surrounding area. (

P. 143)

■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly

● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key.

(

P. 767)

● Starting the hybrid system:

P. 768

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

132

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Electronic key battery depletion

● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.

● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the hybrid system stops. (

P. 746)

● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (

P. 668)

• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate.

• The detection area becomes smaller.

• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:

• TVs

• Personal computers

• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

• Table lamps

• Glass top ranges

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 668

■ Customization

Settings (e. g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

P. 807)

■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized setting

● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk:

Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (

P. 134, 767)

● Starting the hybrid system and changing power switch modes:

P. 768

● Stopping the hybrid system:

P. 190

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

133

■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQ23AAB FCC ID: HYQ14FBA

FCC ID: HYQ14CBA

FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-3

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

3

CAUTION

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system with push-button start antennas. (

P. 123)

The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

● Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

134

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Wireless remote control

Function summary

4

2

1

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

3

Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows and moon roof (press and hold)

*

Opens the trunk

(press and hold)

If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid automatically opens fully.

5

Sounds the alarm

(press and hold) (

P. 135)

*

: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

135

■ Operation signals

Doors:

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

Trunk:

A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been opened.

Windows and moon roof:

A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating.

■ Welcome light illumination control

P. 121

■ Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

■ Panic mode

When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.

■ Security feature

P. 121

■ Alarm

Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.

(

P. 81)

■ Conditions affecting operation

P. 128

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

136

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ If the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key.

(

P. 767)

■ Electronic key battery depletion

P. 132

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 668

■ Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your

Lexus dealer for details.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

P. 807)

■ Certification for wireless remote control

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQ23AAB FCC ID: HYQ14FBA

FCC ID: HYQ14CBA

FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-3

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

137

Doors

Unlocking and locking the doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switches.

◆ Entry function

P. 121

◆ Wireless remote control

P. 134

◆ Door lock switches

2

1

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

3

◆ Inside lock buttons

2

1

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

138

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

2 Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.

The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock

1

2

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

Unlock

Lock

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors.

Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

139

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or canceled:

For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 807.

Function

“Auto Lock by Speed”

“Auto Lock by Shift from P”

“Auto Unlock by Shift to P”

“Auto Unlock by Driver Door”

Operation

All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately

12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

All doors are automatically locked when shifting the shift lever to position other than P.

All doors are automatically unlocked when shifting the shift lever to P.

All doors are automatically unlocked when driver’s door is opened.

3

■ Impact detection door lock release system

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.

Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate.

■ Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (

P. 767)

■ If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

P. 807)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

140

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

CAUTION

■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.

● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.

● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless remote control.

If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the trunk can be closed using the trunk closer.

Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle

Press the opener switch.

If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid automatically opens fully.

141

3

Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle

■ Entry function

P. 121

■ Wireless remote control

P. 134

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

142

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Trunk closer switch (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

Pressing the switch closes the trunk lid automatically. (A buzzer sounds.)

Pressing the switch while the trunk lid is closing opens the trunk lid again.

When closing the trunk

Using the trunk grip, lower the trunk without applying force to the side and push the trunk down from the outside to close it.

Luggage security system

The trunk opener switch can be temporarily disabled to protect luggage stored in the trunk against theft.

1

2

Turn the main switch in the glove box off to disable the trunk opener.

On

Off

The trunk lid cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control or the entry function.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

143

■ Trunk light

The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.

■ Trunk easy closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.

■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside

● When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.

In this case, the trunk lid can be opened pressing the trunk release button on the trunk lid.

● Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key confinement prevention function can be activated so the trunk can be opened.

In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

● Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are locked, the key may not be detected depending on the places and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk.

● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.

■ Overload protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

The trunk lid will not operate when excessive load is present on the top of the trunk lid.

■ Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

While the trunk lid is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the trunk lid from rapidly falling down.

■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

While the trunk lid is closing automatically, the trunk lid will stop closing and open if something gets caught.

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

144

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Internal trunk release lever

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid to the side.

The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.

■ Using the mechanical key

The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (

P. 768)

■ When leaving a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant

P. 119

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Before driving

● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk may be thrown out, causing an accident.

● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.

If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate.

● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.

Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.

■ Important points while driving

Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

145

CAUTION

■ Using the trunk

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.

● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again after it is opened.

● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close.

● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.

● The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened fully.

It is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.

● When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.

● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the trunk handle is used to fully close the trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms being caught.

● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid.

Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed again after it is opened.

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

146

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

CAUTION

■ Trunk easy closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the trunk easy closer begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the trunk lid, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries.

■ Power trunk opener and closer (if equipped)

Observe the following precautions when operating the power trunk opener and closer.

Failure to do so may cause serious injury.

● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close.

● If the trunk closer switch is pressed while the trunk lid is opening during automatic operation, the trunk lid stops opening. Take extra care when on an incline, as the trunk lid may open or close suddenly.

● On an incline, the trunk lid may fall after it opens automatically. Make sure the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.

● In the following situations, the power trunk opener and closer may detect an abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the trunk lid has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped trunk lid may suddenly fall, causing an accident.

• When the trunk lid contacts an obstacle

• When the 12-volt battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the power switch is turned to ON mode or the hybrid system is started during automatic operation

Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. The power trunk opener and closer may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the trunk lid may fall closed again after it is opened.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

147

CAUTION

■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause serious injury.

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the trunk lid fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the trunk lid.

● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

3

NOTICE

■ To prevent trunk easy closer malfunctions (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

Do not apply force to the trunk lid while the trunk easy closer is operating.

■ To prevent damage to the power trunk opener and closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

● Make sure that there is no luggage or snow on the trunk lid before operating the power trunk opener and closer. In addition, make sure that there is no ice between the trunk lid and frame that prevents movement of the trunk lid. Operating the power trunk opener and closer when excessive load is present on the trunk lid may cause a malfunction.

● Do not apply excessive force to the trunk lid while the power trunk opener and closer is operating.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

148

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats

Adjustment procedure

Type A

Type B

1

2

4

3

5

Seat position adjustment switch

Seatback angle adjustment switch

Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch

Vertical height adjustment switch

Seatback upper angle adjustment switch (if equipped)

6

7

8

9

Lumbar support adjustment switch

Pelvic support adjustment switch (if equipped)

Seat cushion length adjustment switch (if equipped)

Seatback side support adjustment switch (if equipped)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

149

■ Power easy access system

The driver’s seat and steering wheel move in accordance with power switch mode and the driver’s seat belt condition. The passenger’s seat moves when the passenger’s door is opened. (

P. 153)

CAUTION

■ When adjusting the seat position

● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

■ Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

■ When adjusting the seat positions

Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

150

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Driving position memory

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled by pressing a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.

Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.

The same buttons are found on the front passenger’s side, allowing the position of the front passenger’s seat to be memorized (if equipped).

Entering a position to memory

1

2

3

4

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the power switch to ON mode.

Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions. (When memorizing the front passenger’s seat, adjust the front passenger’s seat to the desired positions.)

While pressing the “SET” button, or within 3 seconds after the

“SET” button is pressed, press button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps.

If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Recalling the memorized position

1

2

3

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the power switch to ON mode.

Press button “1”, “2” or “3” to recall the desired position.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

151

■ When you want to stop the position recall operation part-way through

Perform any of the following operations:

● Press the “SET” button.

● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.

● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).

■ The adjusted positions that can be memorized

Vehicles without seatback side support adjustment switch

The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumber support switch can be memorized.

Vehicles with seatback side support adjustment switch

All adjusted positions can be memorized.

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

152

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation

(driver’s side only)

A desired driving position can be recalled linked with the unlocking of the door.

■ Setting procedure

Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing the following:

Carrying only the key to which you want to link the driving position, shift the shift lever to P and then close the driver’s door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked properly.

1

2

Turn the power switch to ON mode and recall the position which you want to link.

While pressing the button to recall the position, press the driver’s door lock switch

(either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.

The driving position is recalled when the driver’s door is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control and the driver’s door is opened.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

153

■ Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key for which you want to cancel the linked door unlock operation.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly.

1

2

Turn the power switch to ON mode.

While pressing the “SET” button, press the driver’s door lock switch

(either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.

Power easy access system

The auto away/return function enables easy access by activating when the driver or front passenger attempts to enter or exit the vehicle.

3

■ Auto away function when exiting the vehicle (driver’s/front passenger’s seat)

Driver’s seat

When all of the following actions have been performed, the steering wheel will move up and back to the point farthest away from the driver and the seat will move backward:

• The shift lever has been shifted to P.

• The power switch has been turned off.

• The driver seat belt has been unfastened.

Front passenger’s seat (if equipped)

If the lumbar support, side support (if equipped), etc. of the front passenger’s seat has been adjusted, the seat will return to its original state if the front passenger’s door is opened while the vehicle is stopped to allow easy exit from the vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

154

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ Auto return function when entering the vehicle (driver’s seat only)

When either of the following actions has been performed, the steering wheel will move toward the driver and seat will move forward:

• The power switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode.

• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.

■ When driving position memory is linked with door unlock operation

If the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat will move toward the memorized position but stop slightly beforehand to allow easy access to the vehicle.

Turning the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or fastening the driver’s seat belt moves the seat fully into the memorized position.

■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the power switch off

Driver’s seat:

Memorized seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again. Memorized steering wheel position can be activated by pressing the power switch.

Front passenger’s seat:

Memorized positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the front passenger’s door is opened by pressing button “1”, “2” or “3”.

■ Correct seat position

When the seat is in the most forward or most backward position, and the seat is being moved in those directions, the system may not correctly recognize the current position and the memorized position will not be correctly recalled.

■ The auto away function for exiting the driver’s seat

If the seat is already close to the rearmost position, the auto away function may not operate when the driver exits the vehicle.

■ Customization

The distance that the driver’s seat moves backward during the auto away function can be changed. (Customizable features:

P. 807)

CAUTION

■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Front seats

2

1

Vertical adjustment

Up

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

Angle adjustment (if equipped)

Side support adjustment

The position of the head restraint can be adjusted forward in 4 stages.

(if equipped)

If the head restraint is pulled forward from the foremost position, it will return to the rearmost position.

155

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

156

3-3. Adjusting the seats

1

2

Rear seats

Up

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

■ Removing the head restraints

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

■ Installing the head restraints

 Front seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

Rear seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lowest lock position while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

Lock release button

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

157

■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraint

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.

CAUTION

■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.

● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

158

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure

4

2

1

Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:

Up

Down

3

Toward the driver

Away from the driver

■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode

*

.

*

: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of power switch mode.

■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position

A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory system. (

P. 150)

■ Power easy access system

The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with power switch mode and the driver’s seat belt condition. (

P. 153)

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Inside rear view mirror

159

The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

3

Anti-glare function

1

2

Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.

Changing automatic anti-glare function mode

ON

OFF

When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.

The function will set to ON mode each time the power switch is turned to ON mode.

Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator also turns off.)

Indicator

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

160

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

■ To prevent sensor error

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Rear view mirror adjustment (vehicles with LKA [Lane-Keeping Assist])

To ensure that the LKA operates properly, make sure that it does not block the LKA camera sensor.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Outside rear view mirrors

1

Adjustment procedure

1

2

To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch.

Left

Right

Pressing the same switch again will put the switch in neutral.

2

4

2

3

1

To adjust the mirror, press the switch.

Up

Right

Down

Left

Folding the mirrors

Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle’s rear.

161

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

162

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

■ Linked mirror function when reversing

● When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. To disable this function, select neither “L” nor

“R”.

● If the mirror angle adjustment switch is operated while the linked mirror function is in operation, the angle and position of the mirrors can be remembered, and the mirrors will operate at the angle adjusted to the last time the linked mirror function was operated.

However, because the mirrors move based on the angle they are in when the linked mirror function is not operating, the mirror angle when the linked mirror function is operating will also be changed if the mirrors are adjusted while the function is not operating.

■ When the mirrors are fogged up

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (

P. 384)

■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (

P. 150)

■ Auto anti-glare function

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (

P. 159)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

163

CAUTION

■ Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

■ When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

164

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows

Opening and closing procedures

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

1

2

Closing

One-touch closing

*

3

Opening

4

One-touch opening

*

*

: Pushing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway.

Window lock switch

Press the switch to lock the passenger window switches.

The indicator will come on.

Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

Indicator

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

165

■ The power windows can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■ Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

■ When the power window does not close normally

If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the relevant door.

● After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the power switch is turned to ON mode.

● If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation as explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.

1

2

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has closed.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has opened completely.

3

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once again.

Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has closed.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.

If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

166

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ Door lock linked window operation

● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.

(

P. 767)

*

● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.

*

: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

*

(

P. 134)

■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

■ Power windows open warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the power windows open.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

P. 807)

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Closing the windows

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.

Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.

■ Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

167

Moon roof

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.

1

Opening and closing

Opens the moon roof

*

The moon roof stops slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.

Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof.

2

Closes the moon roof

*

*

: Lightly press either way of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

Tilting up and down

1

Tilts the moon roof up

*

2

Tilts the moon roof down

*

*

: Lightly press either way of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

168

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ The moon roof can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■ Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

■ Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

■ Door lock linked moon roof operation

● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.

*

(

P. 767)

● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.

*

: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

*

(

P. 134)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

169

■ When the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:

● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly

1

2

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.

*

1

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.

*

2

Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up

1

2

3

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “UP” switch tion and stops.

*

1

until the moon roof moves into the tilt up posi-

Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch again.

The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.

*

*

1

2

Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

*

1

: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.

*

2

: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP” switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

170

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ Moon roof open warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof open.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

P. 807)

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■ Opening the moon roof

● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.

● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■ Closing the moon roof

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.

Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.

■ Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

4

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle.......................172

Cargo and luggage....................183

Vehicle load limits .......................186

Trailer towing................................. 187

Dinghy towing...............................188

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch..............189

EV drive mode ............................. 196

Hybrid transmission ...................199

Turn signal lever ......................... 205

Parking brake...............................207

Brake Hold.....................................210

Horn.................................................. 212

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch.......................... 213

Fog light switch.............................218

Windshield wipers

and washer.................................. 219

Headlight cleaner switch ........226

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 227

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Cruise control .............................232

Dynamic radar

cruise control............................236

LKA

(Lane-Keeping Assist)........... 251

Intuitive parking assist................261

Rear view monitor system .......274

Driving mode select switch ...286

Driving assist systems...............289

PCS

(Pre-Collision System).......... 296

BSM

(Blind Spot Monitor)..............305

Lexus night view ............................311

4-6. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips........317

Winter driving tips ...................... 319

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

171

172

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Starting the hybrid system

P. 189

1

2

Driving

3

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (

P. 199)

If the parking brake is in manual mode, release the parking brake.

(

P. 207)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

1

2

Stopping

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to

P. (

P. 199)

Parking the vehicle

1

2

3

4

5

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If the parking brake is in manual mode, set the parking brake.

(

P. 207)

Shift the shift lever to P. (

P. 199)

Press the power switch to stop the hybrid system.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

Starting off on a steep uphill

1

2

3

Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

173

■ When starting off on a uphill

The brake hold is available. (

P. 210)

■ Driving in the rain

● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.

● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■ Breaking in your new Lexus

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:

● For the first 186 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

174

4-1. Before driving

■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down operation.

■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (

P. 792)

■ For efficient use

● Shift the shift lever to D when driving.

In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated.

The hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, requiring unnecessary engine power to recharge.

● Drive your vehicle smoothly.

Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.

● Avoid repeated acceleration.

Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released.

● Shift the shift lever to P when parking.

In the N position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge.

Leaving the shift lever in the N position for an extended period of time may discharge the hybrid battery (traction battery). The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid battery (traction battery) is discharged.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

175

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the hybrid system operating. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

● The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only by the electric motor (traction motor). Because there is no engine noise, the pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle’s movement.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

176

4-1. Before driving

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When driving the vehicle

● During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way:

P. 703

● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (

P. 199)

● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

177

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.

● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid.

● After driving through a puddle, depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.

■ When shifting the shift lever

● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid system. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

● Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

178

4-1. Before driving

CAUTION

■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

Front brakes only: Moderate levels of brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the discs measured.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

■ When the vehicle is stopped

● Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the “READY” indicator is on, and apply the parking brake as necessary.

● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

● Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

179

CAUTION

■ When the vehicle is parked

● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.

● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid system and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the hybrid system is operating.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the hybrid system is operating or immediately after turning the hybrid system off.

Doing so may cause burns.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

180

4-1. Before driving

CAUTION

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

■ When braking

● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.

● The brake system consists of 3 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase.

If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

181

NOTICE

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain driving torque.

● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time.

Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.

● The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (

P. 749)

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

182

4-1. Before driving

NOTICE

■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

● Engine stalling

● Short in electrical components

● Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Lexus dealer check the following:

● Brake function

● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, differential, etc.

● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

183

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

(

P. 186)

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

184

4-1. Before driving

1

2

Example based on your vehicle

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity

When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 825 lb. (370 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:

825 lb. — 366 lb. = 459 lb. (370 kg —166 kg = 204 kg)

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:

459 lb. — 388 lb. = 71 lb. (204 kg — 176 kg = 28 kg)

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

185

CAUTION

■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:

● Receptacles containing gasoline

● Aerosol cans

■ Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.

● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.

• At the feet of the driver

• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

• On the package tray

• On the instrument panel

• On the dashboard

• In front of the Remote Touch screen

● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.

■ Capacity and distribution

● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

186

4-1. Before driving

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.

◆ Total load capacity: 825 lb. (370 kg)

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

◆ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

◆ Towing capacity

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

◆ Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (

P. 661)

CAUTION

■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

187

Trailer towing

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

188

4-1. Before driving

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

189

Power (ignition) switch

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes power switch modes.

Starting the hybrid system

1

2

3

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

4

will be displayed on the multi-information display.

If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.

Press the power switch.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the hybrid system is completely started.

The hybrid system can be started from any power switch mode.

4

5 Check that the “READY” indicator is on.

The vehicle will not move when the “READY” indicator is off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

190

4-2. Driving procedures

Stopping the hybrid system

1

2

3

4

5

Stop the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Set the parking brake. (

P. 207)

Press the power switch.

Release the brake pedal and check that “POWER ON” on the multiinformation display is off.

Changing power switch modes

Modes can be changed by pressing the power switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

Off*

The emergency flashers can be used.

The multi-information display will not be displayed.

ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

“POWER ON” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

“POWER ON” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

*

: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the hybrid system, the power switch will be turned to

ACCESSORY mode, not to off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

191

When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position other than P

1

2

If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the power switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCES-

SORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:

Check that the parking brake is set.

Shift the shift lever to P.

3

4

Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” are displayed alternately on the multi-information display and then press the power switch once.

Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” on the multi-information display are off.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

192

4-2. Driving procedures

■ Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON mode

(the hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the power switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the power switch in

ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

P. 73

■ Electronic key battery depletion

P. 132

■ When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions

It may take time until the “READY” indicator comes on.

■ Conditions affecting operation

P. 128

■ Notes for the entry function

P. 129

■ If the hybrid system does not start

● The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (

P. 79)

Contact your Lexus dealer.

● Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The hybrid system may not start if the shift lever is displaced out of P. “Shift to P position when Starting” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

■ Steering lock

After turning the power switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the power switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

■ When the steering lock cannot be released

“Steering Lock active” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the power switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

4-2. Driving procedures

193

■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.

■ When “Check Access System with Elec. Key” will be displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ If the “READY” indicator does not come on

If the “READY” indicator does not come on when you press the power switch with the shift lever in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ If the hybrid system is malfunctioning

P. 722

■ If the electronic key battery is depleted

P. 668

■ Operation of the power switch

● When operating the power switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the hybrid system may not start or the power switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

● If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the power switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the power switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system.

■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized setting

P. 767

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

194

4-2. Driving procedures

CAUTION

■ When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Caution while driving

If hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency

If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the power switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (

P. 703)

However, do not touch the power switch while driving except in an emergency.

Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

195

NOTICE

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

● Do not leave the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time without the hybrid system on.

● If “POWER ON” is displayed on the multi-information display, the power switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the power switch off.

● Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the power switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur.

■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the power switch

If the power switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

196

4-2. Driving procedures

EV drive mode

In EV drive mode the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the hybrid battery (traction battery), is used to drive the vehicle.

This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for noises and gas emissions.

However, when the vehicle proximity notification system is active, the vehicle may produce sound.

Turns EV drive mode on/off

When EV drive mode is turned on,

“EV MODE” will be displayed on the multi-information display. Pressing the switch when in EV drive mode will return the vehicle to normal driving

(using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]).

■ Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on

It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display.

● The temperature of the hybrid system is high.

The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.

● The temperature of the hybrid system is low.

The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 32  F (0  C) for a long period of time etc.

● The gasoline engine is warming up.

● The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.

The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” display is low.

(

P. 110)

● Vehicle speed is about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

● The windshield defogger is in use.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

197

■ Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold

If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will start automatically in order to warm up. In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode.

To prevent gasoline engine warm up in order to reduce noises, start the hybrid system without starting the gasoline engine, pressing the power switch with fully depressing the brake pedal and pressing the EV drive mode switch.

■ Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode

When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the

EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off.

● The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.

The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” display is low.

(

P. 110)

● Vehicle speed becomes more than about 25 mph (40 km/h).

● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

When it is possible to inform the driver of automatic cancelation in advance, a prior notice screen will appear on the multi-information display.

■ Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode

EV drive mode’s possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred meters to approximately 0.6 mile (1 km). Driving is possible at speeds of less than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are situations when EV drive mode cannot be used.

(The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.)

■ Fuel economy

Your Lexus is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

198

4-2. Driving procedures

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

When driving in EV drive mode no engine noise is made. As such, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them. Therefore, take extra care while driving even if the vehicle proximity notification system is active.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Hybrid transmission

Shifting the shift lever

4-2. Driving procedures

199

While the power switch is in ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

Shift position purpose

Shift position

P

R

N

D

S

Objective or function

Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving

*

1

S mode driving

*

2 (

P. 202)

*

1 : To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in D for normal driving.

*

2 : By selecting shift ranges using S mode, you can control accelerating forces and engine braking forces.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

200

4-2. Driving procedures

Selecting the driving mode

Sport mode/Eco drive mode

P. 286

■ Snow mode

Snow mode can be selected to suit the conditions when driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow.

Press the switch.

Press the switch again to return to normal mode.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

201

Selecting shift ranges in the D position

To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” paddle shift switch. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest shift range, preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches.

1

2

Upshifting

Downshifting

The selected shift range, from D1 to

D5, will be displayed in the meter.

To return to normal D position driving, the “+” paddle shift switch must be held down for a period of time.

■ Shift ranges and their functions

Meter display

D2 - D5

Function

A gear in the range between D1 and the selected shift range is automatically chosen depending on vehicle speed and driving conditions

Setting the shift range at D1 D1

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

202

4-2. Driving procedures

Selecting shift ranges in the S position

2

1

To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to S. Shift ranges can be selected by operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the shift range of your choosing. The shift range can be selected by the shift lever or operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches.

Upshifting

Downshifting

The selected shift range, from S1 to

S6, will be displayed in the meter.

The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to S3, S4 or S5 according to vehicle speed.

■ Shift ranges and their functions

● You can choose from 6 levels of accelerating force and engine braking force.

● A lower shift range will provide greater accelerating force and engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.

● If you accelerate while in ranges 1 to 5, the shift range may automatically range up in accordance with the vehicle’s speed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

203

■ When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position

A shift range will be automatically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range will be one gear lower than the gear in use during normal D position driving.

■ Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position

Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:

● When the vehicle comes to a stop

● If the “+” paddle shift switch is operated when the shift range is in 5

● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time

● When the shift lever is shifted to other than D

■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)

■ Snow mode automatic deactivation

Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the power switch is turned off after driving in snow mode.

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 764

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

204

4-2. Driving procedures

CAUTION

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

NOTICE

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge

If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged even when the engine is running. Therefore, if the vehicle is left with the shift lever in N for a long period of time, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, and this may result in the vehicle not being able to start.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

4

2

1

The lever will return to its original position immediately after operation.

Right turn

Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it)

3

The right hand signals will flash 3 times.

Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)

The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

Left turn

205

4

■ If the turn signals do not stop flashing after turning left or right, or if you want to stop them flashing

Operate the lever in the opposite direction to either position

2

or

3

.

If you move the lever to either position

1

or

4

, the selected turn signals will flash.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

206

4-2. Driving procedures

■ Turn signals can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.

■ Customization

The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.

(Customizable feature

P. 807)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

Parking brake

A selections can be made as desired from the following modes.

1

2

Manual mode

Sets the parking brake

The parking brake indicator light will come on. (

P. 208)

Press and hold the parking brake switch if an emergency occurs and it is necessary to operate the parking brake while driving.

Releases the parking brake

Operate the parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal.

Make sure that the parking brake indicator light goes off.

U.S.A. Canada

207

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

208

4-2. Driving procedures

Automatic mode

The parking brake is set or released automatically according to shift lever operation.

Turns automatic mode on/off

● When the shift lever is moved out of P, the parking brake will be released.

● When the shift lever is moved into

P, the parking brake will be set.

Operate the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

■ Parking brake operation

● When the power switch is not in ON mode, the parking brake cannot be released using the parking brake switch.

● When the power switch is not in ON mode, automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) is not available.

● If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.

■ Parking brake operation sound

When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Parking brake indicator light

● Depending on the power switch mode, the parking brake indicator light will come on and stay on as described below:

ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released.

Not in ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.

● When the power switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

■ When there is a malfunction in the system

Warning lights and/or warning message will turn on or flash. (

P. 713, 726)

Depending on the condition, the parking brake indicator light may flash.

■ Usage in winter time

P. 320

209

NOTICE

■ When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, set the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P and make sure that the vehicle does not move.

■ When the system malfunctions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.

■ When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction

Use the parking brake release tool to manually release the parking brake.

(

P. 765)

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

210

4-2. Driving procedures

Brake Hold

The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in

D, S or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or S to allow smooth start off.

Turns the brake hold system on

The brake hold standby indicator

(green) comes on. While the system is holding the brake, the brake hold operated indicator (yellow) comes on.

■ Brake hold system operating conditions

The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions:

● The trunk or hood is not closed.

● The driver’s door is not closed.

● The driver is not wearing the seat belt.

If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold system is enabled, the system will turn off and the brake hold standby indicator light will go off. In addition, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake, a warning buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. The parking brake will then be set automatically.

■ Brake hold function

● If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the system has started holding the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display.

● To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the brake pedal and press the button again.

● The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. The multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

211

■ When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the brakes

The parking brake will not be released automatically. Release the parking brake by operating the parking brake switch, making sure that the parking brake indicator light goes off. (

P. 207)

■ When there is a malfunction in the system

Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (

P. 713, 725)

CAUTION

■ When the vehicle is on a steep incline

When using the brake hold system on a steep incline exercise caution. The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation.

■ When stopped on a slippery road

The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road.

4

NOTICE

■ When parking the vehicle

The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long period of time. Turning the power switch off while the system is holding the brake may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating the power switch, depress the brake pedal, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

212

Horn

4-2. Driving procedures

To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

213

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Operating instructions

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:

1

2

3

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.

The headlights, daytime running lights and all the lights listed above turn on and off automatically.

(When the power switch is in ON mode.)

4

(U.S.A.)

Off

(Canada)

The daytime running lights turn on.

U.S.A. Canada

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

214

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

1

2

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

215

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped)

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) secures excellent visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of the light axis of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire’s angle as controlled by steering input.

AFS operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.

Deactivating AFS

Turn on the AFS OFF switch.

The indicator turns on when the

AFS is deactivated.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

216

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Daytime running light system

● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the parking lights turn on automatically (at an increased intensity) whenever the hybrid system is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.

● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

■ Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

■ Automatic light off system

When the light switch is in : The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and a door is opened and all of the doors and trunk are closed. (The lights turn off immediately if

on the key is pressed twice after all the doors are closed.)

To turn the lights on again, turn the power switch to ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or .

If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.

■ Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the power switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on.

■ Automatic headlight leveling system

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ If the “AFS OFF” indicator flashes

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

P. 807)

NOTICE

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

217

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

218

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Fog light switch

1

The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog.

2

(U.S.A.)

or

(Canada)

Turns the front fog lights off

Turns the front fog lights on

■ Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Windshield wipers and washer

219

4

2

1

Operating the wiper lever

Operate the lever as follows to operate the wipers. The lever will return to its original position immediately after operation.

(U.S.A.)

or

(Canada)

Move the lever up 2 levels

3

Move the lever up 1 level

(U.S.A.)

or

(Canada)

Move the lever down 1 level

(U.S.A.)

or

(Canada)

Move the lever down 2 levels

AUTO mode indicator

5

AUTO mode on/off switch

With AUTO mode selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.

AUTO mode indicator will turn on when AUTO mode is selected.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

220

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Status before operation

Operation

Off

Low speed operation

High speed operation

AUTO mode

Intermittent operation

Continuously

Temporary operation

Off

Off

Off

or

Temporary operation

Off

Low speed operation

Temporary operation

*

1

No change or

Low speed operation

High speed operation or

No change No change

Low speed operation

*

2

High speed operation

High speed operation

High speed operation

*

2

*

1

: After temporary operation, the mode will return to AUTO mode.

*

2

: AUTO mode will be canceled.

When AUTO mode is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by turning the switch ring.

6

7

Increases the sensitivity

Decreases the sensitivity

8

Washer/wiper dual operation

Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

221

Switching to the intermittent windshield wipers

The wipers can be used as intermittent windshield wipers, which operate regardless of vehicle speed or amount of raindrops.

Press and hold until the AUTO mode indicator stops flashing.

If is pressed and held until the

AUTO mode indicator stops flashing again, it will return to its previous state.

The wiper can be switched when the vehicle is stopped and the wiper is off.

■ Operating the intermittent windshield wipers

1 (U.S.A.)

or

(Canada)

Move the lever up 2 levels

2

3

4

Move the lever up 1 level

(U.S.A.)

or

(Canada)

Move the lever down 1 level

(U.S.A.)

or

(Canada)

Move the lever down 2 levels

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

222

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Operation

Status before operation

or or or

Off

Intermittent operation

Low speed operation

High speed operation

Temporary operation

Off

Off

Off

Temporary operation

Off

Intermittent operation

Low speed operation

Intermittent operation

Low speed operation

High speed operation

No change

High speed operation

High speed operation

High speed operation

No change

5

6

Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.

Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

7

Washer/wiper dual operation

Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

223

■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■ Dripping prevention wiper sweep

After washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.

However, the last sweep will not happen if the vehicle is traveling above 106 mph

(170 km/h).

■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation

Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in AUTO mode.

● Intermittent wiper interval

● Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention wiper sweep occurs)

With low speed windshield wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

224

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Raindrop sensor

● The raindrop sensor judges the amount of raindrops.

An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or setting of the sun intermittently strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the windshield.

● If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode while the power switch is in ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated.

● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or -22°F

(-30°C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than AUTO mode.

■ When the windshield wipers are in temporary operation

AUTO mode cannot be activated even if is pressed.

■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

CAUTION

■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.

■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm.

The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

225

M

NOTICE

■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.

■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

■ When standing the windshield wipers up

Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (

P. 322)

Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

226

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight cleaner switch

Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.

Press the switch to clean the headlights.

■ The headlight cleaners can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on.

■ Windshield washer linked operation

When the windshield washer is operated with the power switch in ON mode and the headlights on, the headlight cleaners will operate once. (

P. 219)

NOTICE

■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehicle

● Close all the doors and windows, and turn the power switch off.

● Confirm the type of fuel.

227

■ Fuel types

Use premium unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 91 [Research Octane Number 96] or higher)

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

228

4-4. Refueling

CAUTION

■ When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

■ When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:

● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.

● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.

● Do not top off the fuel tank.

NOTICE

■ Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1

Opening the fuel tank cap

With the doors unlocked, press the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door.

Push until you hear a click and take your hand away to slightly open the fuel filler door. Then open the door fully by hand.

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.

4-4. Refueling

229

4

3 Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

230

4-4. Refueling

■ If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull the lever to open the fuel filler door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened pressing the rearward of the fuel filler door.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-4. Refueling

231

1

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

2 Close the fuel filler door, and press the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door until you hear a click.

When you lock the doors, the fuel filler door will lock also.

■ Fuel filler door lock condition

The fuel filler door may not be locked even when the vehicle’s doors are locked in the following conditions:

● When operating the door lock button inside the vehicle

● When the automatic door locking system is operated (

P. 810)

● When the fuel filler door is closed after the vehicle’s doors are locked

CAUTION

■ When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.

Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

232

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Cruise control

Summary of functions

1

2

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Indicators

Cruise control switch

1

Setting the vehicle speed

Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will come on.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

2 Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed.

“SET” indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

233

Adjusting the set speed

1

2

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

1

2

Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.

The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.

Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately

25 mph (40 km/h).

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

234

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Cruise control can be set when

● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift.

● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

■ Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.

● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

● VSC is activated.

● TRAC is activated for a period of time.

● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.

■ If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multi-information display

Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

235

CAUTION

■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● During emergency towing

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

236

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Dynamic radar cruise control

Summary of functions

1

2

3

4

5

Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button

Display

Set speed

Indicators

Cruise control switch

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

237

1

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control.

Radar cruise control indicator will come on.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

2 Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed.

“SET” indicator will be displayed.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

238

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Adjusting the set speed

1

2

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

• When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held

• When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

Fine adjustment: By approximately 0.6 mph (1 km/h) each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held

In the constant speed control mode (

P. 243), the set speed will be increased or

decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

1

2

3

Pressing the button changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

Long

Medium

Short

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the power switch is turned to ON mode.

If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed.

Preceding vehicle mark

239

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.

Distance options

Long

Medium

Short

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)

Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)

Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

240

4-5. Using the driving support systems

1

2

Canceling and resuming the speed control

Pulling the lever toward you cancels the cruise control.

The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed.

Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately

25 mph (40 km/h).

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

241

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-tovehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill slopes.

4

1

2

Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.

Example of deceleration cruising

When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

242

4-5. Using the driving support systems

4

3

Example of follow-up cruising

When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed

The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.

Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than the set speed

The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.

Approach warning

When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

■ Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not occur:

● When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your vehicle speed

● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed

● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set

● At the instant the accelerator is applied

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

243

Selecting conventional constant speed control mode

2

1

When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to dirt etc.

Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control.

Radar cruise control indicator will come on.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

Switch to constant speed control mode.

(Push the lever forward and hold for approximately one second.)

Cruise control indicator will come on.

When in constant speed control mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, push the lever forward again and hold for approximately 1 second.

After the desired speed has been set, it is not possible to return to vehicleto-vehicle distance control mode.

If the power switch is turned off and then turned to ON mode again, the vehicle will automatically return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.

Adjusting the speed setting:

P. 233

Canceling and resuming the speed setting:

P. 233

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

244

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when

● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift.

● Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).

■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.

■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations:

● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

● VSC is activated.

● TRAC is activated for a period of time.

● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.

● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.

● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wipers are in AUTO mode or the high speed wiper operation).

● When snow mode is set.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

245

■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control

The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations:

● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

● VSC is activated.

● TRAC is activated for a period of time.

● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.

■ When the LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) will be activated

Using the radar cruise control in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, lane keeping assistance control is activated.

■ Radar sensor and grille cover

Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)

Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.

1

2

Grille cover

Radar sensor

4

■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (

P. 723)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

246

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Certification

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator (antenna) and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

247

CAUTION

■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control

Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.

Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc.

■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Assisting the driver to measure following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.

Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.

● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

248

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION

■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● At entrances to expressways

● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often

● During emergency towing

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

249

CAUTION

■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in front of you.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning (

P. 242) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious accident

may result.

● Vehicles that cut in suddenly

● Vehicles traveling at low speeds

● Vehicles that are not moving

● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)

● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function correctly

Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious accident may result:

● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the functioning of the sensor

● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk etc.)

● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable

● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

250

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION

■ Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.

Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.

● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.

Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.

● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding area.

● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.

● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)

251

Summary of functions

While driving on a freeway or motor highway that has lane markers and no sharp curves, the system recognizes the lanes using a camera located above the inside rear view mirror as a sensor to assist the driver with staying in the lane. The LKA system has two functions.

Camera sensor

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

: If equipped

252

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Functions included in the LKA

1

2

Lane departure warning function

If the system judges that the vehicle may deviate from its lane, it alerts the driver using beeping, screen displays and a sensory warning

*

given via the steering wheel.

*

: A slight steering torque is applied for a short period of time in the direction of the center of the lane.

Lane keeping assist function

• This function will be active when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode of the cruise control (

P. 236) is set with vehicle speed

above approximately 45 mph (72 km/h) and while the lane departure warning function is active.

• When the lane keeping assist function is active, a slight steering torque will be applied, to help the driver maintain the vehicle inside the lane.

The lane keeping assist function will be temporarily canceled if the steering wheel is not operated, or if you continue driving with your hands lightly touching the steering wheel. (

P. 256)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Turning the LKA system on

Press the “LKA” switch to activate the system.

“LKA” indicator will come on.

Press the switch again to turn the LKA system off.

The LKA system will revert to off each time the power switch is turned to ON mode.

253

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

254

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Operating conditions for each function

Lane departure warning function

● When the vehicle speed is approximately 30 mph (48 km/h) or more

● When the lane width is more than approximately 9.1 ft. (2.8 m)

● When driving on a straight road or through a curve with a radius of more than approximately 394 ft. (120 m)

■ Lane keeping assist function

● When the vehicle speed is between approximately 45 and 112 mph

(72 and 180 km/h)

● When the vehicle-to-vehicle distance mode of the radar cruise control is on, and the set vehicle speed is approximately 45 mph (72 km/h) or more (the function will not operate when the radar cruise control is in set speed mode)

● When the lane width is between approximately 9.1 and 13.1 ft.

(2.8 and 4.0 m)

● When driving on a straight road or through a curve with a radius of more than approximately 755 ft. (230 m)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

255

Indication on the multi-information display

2

3

4

1

When the LKA system is on, the lane line display and steering wheel display are shown.

Lane keeping assist function operation indication

Steering wheel displayed:

Indicates that the function is currently operating. (If the lane departure warning operates at this time, the steering wheel flashes orange.)

Steering wheel not displayed:

Indicates that the function is not currently operating. (When the lane keeping assist function is canceled, the buzzer will beep twice.)

Dynamic radar cruise control display

Lane departure warning function indication (when the inside of the white line is white):

The function has recognized lane markers. (If the lane departure warning operates at this time, the lines flash orange.)

Lane departure warning function indication (when the inside of the white line is black):

A lane marker is not recognized by the system, or the LKA system functions are temporarily canceled.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

256

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Temporary cancelation of the LKA system functions

If any of the following occurs, the LKA system functions will be temporarily canceled.

The functions will resume after the necessary operating conditions have returned.

● The steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to cause the vehicle to change lanes.

● When the system detects no-handed driving. (The lane keeping assist function will be temporarily canceled, but the lane departure warning function will continue.)

● The turn signal lever is operated.

● The vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LKA system functions.

(The buzzer will beep twice when the lane keeping assist function is being canceled.)

● When the lane lines cannot be recognized while driving. (The buzzer will beep twice when the lane keeping assist function is being canceled.)

● The wiper switch is set on high speed mode or is set on AUTO mode with wipers operating at high speed. (The lane keeping assist function will be temporarily canceled, but the lane departure warning function will continue.)

● If the vehicle crosses a line for approximately half a minute or more. (The lane keeping assist function will be temporarily canceled, but the lane departure warning function will continue.)

● When the lane departure warning function is activated.

The lane departure warning function will not operate again for a several seconds after it has been activated, even if the vehicle leaves the lane again.

■ The lane departure warning

It may be difficult to feel the sensory warning depending on the road conditions.

■ No-handed driving warning

If the steering wheel is not operated for approximately 15 seconds on a straight road or approximately 5 seconds on a curve, the buzzer will beep twice, indicators on the multi-information display will flash, and the lane keeping assist function will be temporarily canceled. If you drive the vehicle with your hands lightly touching the steering wheel, this may also be detected as no-handed driving.

■ After the vehicle has been parked in the sun

The LKA system functions may not be available and a warning message (

P. 735)

will be displayed for a while after driving has started. In such cases, turn the LKA system off and turn it on again after normal temperature returns. When the temperature in the cabin decreases and the temperature around the camera sensor (

P. 251)

becomes suitable for its operation, the functions will begin to operate.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

257

■ If there are lane markers on only one side of the vehicle

The lane keeping assist function will not operate. Also, the lane departure warning will not operate for the side on which lane markers could not be recognized.

■ Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly

In the following conditions, the LKA system functions may not operate, or it may not be possible to ensure adequate performance. Also, the camera sensor may be unable to recognize lane lines causing the lane departure warning function to operate incorrectly, or the lane keeping assist function may not operate properly. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

● When driving through an area with no lane markers, such as a tollbooth, a crossing or before a ticket checkpoint

● When driving on a sharp curve

● When lanes are extremely narrow or extremely wide

● When the vehicle leans to one side an unusual amount due to a heavy load or improper tire inflation pressure

● When the following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is extremely short

● When the lane markers are yellow (These may be more difficult for the system to recognize compared to white markers.)

● When the lane markers are broken, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or stones

● When lane markers are obscured or partially obscured by sand, dirt, etc.

● When there are shadows on the road running parallel with lane markers, or if a shadow covers the lane markers

● When driving on a particularly bright road surface, such as concrete

● When driving on a road surface that is bright due to reflected light

● When driving in a location where the light level changes rapidly, such as the entrance to or exit from a tunnel

● When sunlight or the headlights of oncoming vehicles are shining directly into the camera lens

● When driving on roads that are branching or merging

● When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, previous rainfall, standing water, etc.

● When the vehicle experiences strong up-and-down motion such as when driving on an extremely rough road or on a seam in the pavement

● When headlight brightness at nighttime is reduced due to dirt on the lenses, or when the headlights are misaligned

● When driving with a strong crosswind

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

258

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● When driving on winding roads or roads that are uneven

● When driving on rough or unpaved roads

■ When changing the tires

Depending on the tires used, sufficient performance may not be maintainable.

■ Warning messages for LKA

Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (

P. 724, 735)

CAUTION

■ Before using the LKA system

Do not rely solely on the LKA system. The LKA system does not drive the vehicle automatically, nor does it reduce the amount of care you need to take. As such, the driver must always assume full responsibility for understanding his/her surroundings, for operating the steering wheel to correct the driving line, and for driving safely.

Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an accident.

■ To avoid operating the LKA by mistake

Switch the LKA off using the “LKA” switch when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for LKA

Do not use LKA in any of the following situations.

Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.

● When driving with snow tires, tire chains, a spare tire, or similar equipment

● When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.

● When there are objects or structures along the roadside that might be misinterpreted as lane markers (such as guardrails, curb, reflector posts, etc.)

● When driving on snowy roads

● When pavement lane markers are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, etc.

● When there are visible lines on the pavement from road repairs, or if the remains of old lane markers are still visible on the road

● When driving on slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● When driving in a lane other than the driving or passing lanes on a freeway or highway

● When driving on a road with lane closures due to maintenance, or when driving in a temporary lane

● When emergency towing

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

259

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to or incorrect operation of the LKA system

● Do not modify the headlights or attach stickers to the surface of the lights.

● Do not modify the suspension or sun visor, or replace them with non-genuine parts.

● Do not install or place anything on the hood or the grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.).

● Do not modify the sun visor or replace it with anything other than a genuine

Lexus product.

● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Camera sensor (

P. 251)

Observe the following to ensure that the LKA system functions correctly.

● Keep the windshield clean at all times.

Performance could be affected if the windshield is dirty, or if raindrops, condensation or ice are adhering to the windshield.

● Do not attach a sticker or other items to the windshield near the camera sensor.

● Do not install or place anything near the camera.

4

● When adjusting the rear view mirror, make sure that it does not block the camera lens.

● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.

● Do not install an antenna in front of the camera lens.

● If the windshield is fogged up, use the windshield defogger to remove fog from the windshield.

When it is cold, using the heater with air blowing to the feet may allow the upper part of the windshield to fog up. This will have a negative effect on the images.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

260

4-5. Using the driving support systems

NOTICE

● Do not place anything on the dashboard.

The camera sensor may recognize the image reflected on the windshield as lane markers by mistake.

● Do not scratch the camera lens, or let it get dirty.

When cleaning the inside of the windshield, be careful not to get any glass cleaner etc. on the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.

For lens repair, contact your Lexus dealer.

● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it. The direction of the camera sensor is precisely adjusted.

● Do not subject the camera sensor to strong impact or force, and do not disassemble the camera sensor.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Intuitive parking assist

261

The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the multi-information display, Remote Touch screen and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.

■ Types of sensors

4

1

2

4

3

Front center sensors

Front corner sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

262

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Intuitive parking assist switch

Turns the intuitive parking assist on/off

When on, the indicator light comes on to inform the driver that the system is operational.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

263

Display

When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multiinformation display and Remote Touch screen depending on the position and distance to the obstacle.

■ Multi-information display

1 Front corner sensor detection

2

3

4

Front center sensor detection

Rear corner sensor detection

Rear center sensor detection

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

264

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Remote Touch screen

For 8-inch display

1 When the rear view monitor system is not displayed

2

A graphic is automatically displayed when an obstacle is detected. The screen can be set so that the graphic is not displayed.

(

P. 269)

When the rear view monitor system is displayed (insert display)

A simplified image is displayed on the right upper corner of the

Remote Touch screen when an obstacle is detected.

For 12.3-inch display

A graphic will be shown on the side display

A graphic is automatically displayed when an obstacle is detected. The screen can be set so that the graphic is not displayed.

(

P. 269)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

265

Sensor detection display, obstacle distance

Front center sensor

Approximate distance to obstacle

Multiinformation display

8-inch display

Remote Touch screen

8-inch display

(insert display)

12.3-inch display

3.3 ft. (100 cm) to

1.6 ft. (50 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (blinking slowly)

(continuous)

4

1.6 ft. (50 cm) to

1.2 ft. (37.5 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (blinking) (continuous)

1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) to

1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (blinking rapidly)

(continuous)

Less than

1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(blinking) (continuous) (continuous) (continuous)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

266

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Corner sensors

Approximate distance to obstacle

Multiinformation display

8-inch display

Remote Touch screen

8-inch display

(insert display)

12.3-inch display

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to

1.5 ft. (45 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (blinking) (continuous)

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to

1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (blinking rapidly)

(continuous)

Less than

1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(blinking) (continuous) (continuous) (continuous)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

267

■ Rear center sensor

Approximate distance to obstacle

Multi-information display

Remote Touch screen

8-inch display

(insert display)

12.3-inch display

4.9 ft. (150 cm) to

2.0 ft. (60 cm)

(continuous)

(blinking slowly)

(continuous)

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to

1.5 ft. (45 cm)

(continuous)

(blinking)

(continuous)

4

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to

1.1 ft. (35 cm)

(continuous)

(blinking rapidly)

(continuous)

Less than

1.1 ft. (35 cm)

(blinking)

(continuous)

(continuous)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

268

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle

A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.

● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.

When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously:

• Front center sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

• Corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

• Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)

● When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps.

1

2

Detection range of the sensors

3

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)

Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

269

Setting up intuitive parking assist

1

2

You can change the warning beep volume and Remote Touch screen operating conditions.

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (

P. 328)

Select “SETUP” on the “Menu” screen.

3 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.

4

2

3

1

Select “Lexus Park Assist” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.

Alert volume setting

Display on/off

Alert distance setting

Make sure to save after changing settings.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

270

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Alert volume setting

The alert volume can be adjusted.

1 Select “1” to “5” on the “LEXUS Park Assist Settings”.

2

1

Select “Save”.

■ Display on/off setting

On or off can be selected for intuitive parking assist display.

Select “Display Off”.

2

When the “Display Off” indicator is turned on, the display of intuitive parking assist will be off. Select “Display Off” again to turn the display of intuitive parking assist on.

Select “Save”.

■ Alert distance setting

Front or rear center sensors display and tone indication can be set.

1 Select “Front” or “Rear”.

2

Long distance or short distance can be selected.

Select “Save”.

■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when

● Front center sensors:

• The power switch is in ON mode.

• The shift lever is in a position other than P or R.

• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).

● Front corner sensors:

• The power switch is in ON mode.

• The shift lever is in a position other than P.

• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).

● Rear corner and rear center sensors:

• The power switch is in ON mode.

• The shift lever is in R.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

271

■ Intuitive parking assist display

When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor system, is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the top right of the screen even if the display setting has been set to off.

■ Sensor detection information

● The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s front corner and rear bumpers.

● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below.

• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this problem.)

• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)

In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal display, or obstacles may not be detected.

• The sensor is covered in any way.

• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.

• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.

• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.

• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.

• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.

• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.

• Towing eyelets are installed.

• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.

• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.

• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.

• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.

• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.

• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.

• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.

In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shape, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they are.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

272

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles:

• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves

• Sharply-angled objects

• Low obstacles

• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle

● The following situations may occur during use.

• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.

• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.

• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the sensor’s detection areas before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds.

• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected for collision when approached, even if they have been detected once.

• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow noise of air conditioning system.

■ If a message is displayed on the multi-information display

P. 723, 734

■ Certification

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

273

CAUTION

■ When using the intuitive parking assist

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.

● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).

● The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving forward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.

● Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.

NOTICE

■ When using intuitive parking assist-sensor

In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sounds when no obstacles are detected.

● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.

● If the bumper collides with something.

● If the display shows continuously without a beep.

● If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.

If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.

■ Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

274

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Rear view monitor system

The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle and fixation guide lines while backing up, for example while parking.

The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.

Rear view monitor system will activate when the shift lever is in R.

If you move the lever out of R, the rear view monitor system will be deactivated.

When the shift lever is shifted to the R position and any mode button (such as

“MENU”) is pressed, the rear view monitor system is canceled, and the screen is switched to the mode of the button that was pressed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

275

Using the rear view monitor system

Screen description

The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to R while the power switch is in ON mode.

1

2

4

3

5

Vehicle width extension guide line

The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.

Vehicle center guide lines

These lines indicate the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

Distance guide line

The line shows points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the center of the edge of the bumper.

Distance guide line

The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 3 ft. (1 m)

(blue) from the edge of the bumper.

Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped)

If an obstacle is detected while the Intuitive parking assist-sensor is on, a display is shown in the top right corner of the screen.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

276

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Rear view monitor system precautions

Area displayed on screen

The rear view monitor system displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle.

To adjust the image on the rear view monitor system screen.

(

P. 332)

• The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions.

• Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed.

• The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.

• Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed on the monitor.

Corners of bumper

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Rear view monitor system camera

The camera for the rear view monitor system is located above the license plate.

277

● Using the camera

If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water droplets, snow or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse.

■ Differences between the screen and the actual road

The distance guide lines and the vehicle width extension guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

The distances between the vehicle width extension guide lines and the left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the fixation guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

278

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road.

● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be further from the vehicle than the actual distance.

Because of this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● When any part of the vehicle sags

When any part of the vehicle sags due to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the fixation guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

A margin of error

279

■ When approaching three-dimensional objects

The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.

● Distance guidelines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle.

On the screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point

2

.

However, in reality if you back up to point

1

, you will hit the truck.

On the screen, it appears that

1 is closest and

3

is furthest away.

However, in reality, the distance to

1

and

3

is the same, and is farther than

1

and

3

.

2

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

280

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Vehicle width extension guide lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In the case shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the vehicle width extension guide lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck.

However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the vehicle width extension guide lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the vehicle width extension guide lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

281

Things you should know

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Symptom Solution

The image is difficult to see

Likely cause

• The vehicle is in a dark area

• The temperature around the lens is either high or low

• The outside temperature is low

• There are water droplets on the camera

• It is raining or humid

• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is adhering to the camera

• There are scratches on the camera

• Sunlight or headlights are shining directly into the camera

• The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights etc.

If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.)

To adjust the image on the rear view monitor system screen. (

P. 332)

The image is blurry

Dirt or foreign matter

(such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to the camera.

Rinse the camera lens with water and wipe it clean with a soft cloth.

Wash with a mild soap if the dirt is stubborn.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

282

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The image is out of alignment

Symptom Likely cause

The camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact.

The fixation guide lines are very far out of alignment

The camera position is out of alignment.

Solution

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

283

CAUTION

■ When using the rear view monitor system

When backing up, be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehicle before proceeding.

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries.

● The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when backing up. Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up. Always make sure your intended path is clear.

Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.

● Never back up while looking only at the screen.

The image shown on the screen may differ from the actual state, and you could collide with another vehicle or obstacles if backing up looking only at the screen, possibly causing an accident. When backing up, be sure to check in front of and behind the vehicle, both directly and with mirrors.

● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.

● The instructions given are only guidelines.

When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view monitor system.

● When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering into it.

● Do not use system in the following cases:

• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow

• When using tire chains or the compact spare tire

• When the trunk lid is not closed completely

• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.

● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to check direct visually and with mirror all around the vehicle before proceeding.

● If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixation guide lines displayed on the screen may change.

● The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances. (

P. 277)

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

284

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION

■ When using the rear view monitor system screen

● The position of the fixation guide lines displayed on the screen may change in accordance with the number of passengers, the amount of cargo etc. Be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle direct visually and with mirror before proceeding.

● The vehicle width extension guide lines are wider than the actual width of the vehicle. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle direct visually and with mirror before proceeding.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

285

NOTICE

■ How to use the camera

● The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases, or if the precautions described below are not followed.

• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change.

• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

• Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it cannot transmit a clear image.

• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.

• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.

• When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium light or mercury light etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.

● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

286

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving mode select switch

The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.

1

2

Normal mode

For normal driving.

Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when selected to

Eco drive mode or sport mode.

Eco drive mode

Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that involve frequent accelerating.

When not in Eco drive mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the left, the “ECO MODE” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

287

3

Sport mode

• SPORT S mode

Assists acceleration response by controlling the hybrid system. Suitable for when precise handling is desirable, for example when driving on mountain roads.

When not in SPORT S mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the right, the “SPORT S” indicator comes on in the multi-information display, and the Hybrid System Indicator changes to the tachometer. (

P. 89)

Also, on vehicles equipped with a

12.3-inch display, the driving mode is also automatically displayed on the “Side Display”. (

P. 330)

4

• SPORT S+ mode

Helps to ensure steering performance and driving stability by simultaneously controlling the steering and suspension in addition to the hybrid system. Suitable for sporty driving.

When in SPORT S mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the right, the “SPORT S+” indicator comes on in the multi-information display, and the Hybrid System Indicator changes to the tachometer. (

P. 89)

Also, on vehicles equipped with a

12.3-inch display, the driving mode is also automatically displayed on the “Side Display”. (

P. 330)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

288

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency (

P. 364). To improve air condition-

ing performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.

■ Automatic operation of the seat heater during Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating operation and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. If the driving mode select switch is switched to Eco drive mode in cold temperatures, the seat heater will be automatically operated to assist heating performance.

■ Sport mode automatic deactivation

Sport mode is automatically deactivated if the power switch is turned off after driving in sport mode.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving assist systems

289

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

◆ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

◆ Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces

◆ TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

◆ EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

290

4-5. Using the driving support systems

◆ AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension system)

By independently controlling the damping force of the shock absorbers for each of the 4 wheels according to the road and driving conditions, this system helps riding comfort with superior steering stability, and helps good vehicle posture (

P. 286)

◆ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)

Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC and

EPS

Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes, hybrid system output, steering assist, and steering ratio

◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)

P. 296

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating

The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating.

291

Disabling the TRAC/VSC systems

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC/VSC systems may reduce power from the hybrid system to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

■ Turning off the TRAC system only

To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release the button.

The “TRAC OFF” will be shown on the multi-information display. Press the button again to turn the system back on.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

292

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Turning off both TRAC/VSC systems

To turn the TRAC/VSC systems off, press and hold the button for

3 seconds and more while the vehicle is stopped.

The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the “TRAC OFF” will be shown on the multi-information display.

Press the button again to turn the systems back on.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

293

■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that

TRAC has been disabled even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed

TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC systems

● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the hybrid system is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating.

None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

■ EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Reactivation of the TRAC/VSC systems

Even after the TRAC/VSC systems have been turned off, turning the hybrid system off and then on again will automatically reactivate the TRAC/VSC systems.

■ Reactivation of the TRAC system linked to vehicle speed

When only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases. However, when both TRAC/VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.

■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result.

will improve after a short while.

*

Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The effectiveness

*

: If the LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system cannot operate in this case, a warning message will be shown on the multi-information display.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

294

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION

■ The ABS does not operate effectively when

● Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).

● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations:

● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

● When driving with tire chains

● When driving over bumps in the road

● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

■ TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

■ When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the

TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

295

CAUTION

■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■ Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

296

4-5. Using the driving support systems

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

When the radar sensor detects that a frontal collision is highly likely or even unavoidable, safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged to lessen impact as well as vehicle damage.

The pre-collision system can be turned on and off as necessary by operating the switch. (

P. 297)

◆ Pre-collision seat belts (front seat only)

If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the pre-collision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.

The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses control of the vehicle. (

P. 34)

◆ Pre-collision brake assist

When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.

◆ Pre-collision braking

When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns the driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automatically applied to reduce the collision speed.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

297

◆ Suspension control

When the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the operation of AVS (

P. 290) optimally controls the damping force of the

shock absorber.

◆ Driver monitor system (if equipped)

When the system determines that there is a possibility of a collision, and either the driver is not facing forward or the driver’s eyes are closed,

PCS warnings are given in advance to warn the driver. If the system determines that the conditions to operate pre-collision alert braking have been met even when the possibility of a collision increases further, pre-collision alert braking will operate.

1

2

Disabling pre-collision system

Enabled

Disabled

The “PCS” warning light comes on when pre-collision system is disabled.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

298

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Radar sensor

The radar sensor detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position, speed, and heading of the obstacles.

Driver monitor sensor (if equipped)

The driver monitor sensor detects the direction the driver is facing and whether the driver’s eyes are open or closed.

The system determines whether the driver is facing forward and whether or not the driver’s eyes are closed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

299

■ The pre-collision system is operational when

The pre-collision system off button is not pressed and the following conditions are met:

● Pre-collision warning:

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).

• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).

● Pre-collision seat belts (operating conditions A):

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).

• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.

• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.

● Pre-collision seat belts (operating conditions B):

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 4 mph (5 km/h).

• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).

• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.

● Pre-collision brake assist:

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).

• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).

• The brake pedal is depressed.

● Pre-collision braking:

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).

• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).

● Suspension control:

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 4 mph (5 km/h).

• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).

● Pre-collision alert braking:

• The system determines that the driver is not facing forward, or that the driver’s eyes are closed.

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 25 mph (40 km/h).

• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 25 mph (40 km/h).

• The steering is not being turned.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

300

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of a collision

● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve

● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve

● When driving over a narrow iron bridge

● When there is a metal object on the road surface

● When driving on an uneven road surface

● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn

● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front

● When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure appears to be directly in the vehicle’s line of travel

● When climbing a steep hill causes an overhead billboard or other metallic structure to appear directly in the vehicle’s line of travel

When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten it.

■ Obstacles not detected

The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as traffic cones. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.

■ Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly

The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:

● On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces

● If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection

● If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking

● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms

● When your vehicle is skidding such as the VSC system off

● When your vehicle is steeply inclined

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

301

■ Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system

When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in the sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be automatically disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if there is a collision possibility.

■ When there is a malfunction in the system

“PCS” warning light will flash and warning messages will be displayed.

(

P. 713, 723)

■ Certification

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator (antenna) and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

302

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION

■ Limitations of the pre-collision system

Do not overly rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.

Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.

● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.

Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.

● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding area.

● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.

● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.

■ Determining the direction the driver is facing and whether the driver’s eyes are open or closed

The direction the driver is facing and whether the driver’s eyes are open or closed may not be determined correctly if the following conditions exist:

● There is an object between the driver monitor sensor and the driver’s face, such as when the sensor is blocked.

● A part of the driver’s face is covered.

● The sensor or the driver’s face is exposed to intense light such as sunlight.

● The driving posture is improper.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

303

CAUTION

■ Handling the driver monitor sensor

Observe the following to ensure the driver monitor sensor can function effectively.

Failure to do so may result in a malfunction or may prevent the system from correctly determining the direction the driver is facing, resulting in an unexpected accident.

● Do not disassemble, damage, lift or pull on the sensor.

● Do not select the sensor while driving.

● Do not wet or spill water on the sensor.

● Do not drop anything on or allow anything to hit against the sensor. Do not subject the sensor to an impact.

● Make sure that there are no scratches, dirt or stickers on the side of the sensor that faces the driver.

● Do not place any objects in front of the side of the sensor that faces the driver or cover the sensor.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

304

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION

■ Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system

By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-JUDGE-ACT.

There are limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep in mind the following important points.

● Assisting the driver in watching the road

The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

● Assisting the driver in making correct judgment

When attempting to estimate the likelihood of a collision, the only data available to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situation.

● Assisting the driver in taking action

The pre-collision system’s braking assist feature is designed to help reduce the severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely. For this reason, when encountering a dangerous situation the driver must take direct and immediate action in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

NOTICE

■ Precautions for cleaning the driver monitor sensor

● Gently wipe the sensor with a soft cloth to prevent damage.

● Wipe any excess dirt with a cloth dampened with neutral detergent, all liquids having been wringed out of the cloth. After that, wipe again with a dry cloth.

● Do not use benzene, thinner, glass cleaners, wax, etc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

305

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that assists the driver to confirm safety when changing lanes.

The system uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicle’s existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator.

4

1

2

BSM main switch

Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set to on, the switch’s indicator illuminates.

Outside rear view mirror indicator

When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator on that side illuminates. If the turn signal lever is operated when a vehicle is in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

306

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas

2

3

The blind spot that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

1

The range of the detection area extends to:

Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from the side of the vehicle

The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle is not in the detection area

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper

Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

307

■ The Blind Spot Monitor system is operational when

The BSM main switch is set to on and vehicle speed is greater than approximately

25 mph (40 km/h).

■ The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle when

● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.

● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.

■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor will not detect a vehicle

The Blind Spot Monitor system is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.

*

● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects

*

● Following vehicles that are in the same lane

*

● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle

*

*

: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

308

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor system may not function correctly

● The Blind Spot Monitor system may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:

• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.

• When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water etc.

• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection area as your vehicle accelerates

• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the road etc.

• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle

• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away from your vehicle

• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle

• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

• Directly after the BSM switch is set to on

● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase under the following conditions:

• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall etc.

• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle

• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle enters the detection area

■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility

When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

309

■ When there is a malfunction in the system

If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warning messages will be displayed: (

P. 727)

● There is a malfunction with the sensors

● The sensors have become dirty

● The outside temperature is extremely high or low

● The sensor voltage has become abnormal

■ Certification for the BSM

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: OAYBSDTX

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

(3) This device may only work when the vehicle is in operation pursuant to § 15.252

(a) (4).

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

IC: 4135A-BSDTX

This device complies with the radio standards specification RSS-220 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE

During printing time of this user manual the approvals listed below are granted. Further countries may become available or actual certification identifiers may be subject to change or update.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

310

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION

■ Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplementary system which alerts the driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor system. The system cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

■ Handling the radar sensor

One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot

Monitor system can function correctly.

● Keep the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper clean at all times.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by your Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.

● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

● Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Lexus night view

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lexus night view is a system which assists with nighttime driving.

Near-infrared rays are irradiated forward and an image converted from the irradiated light is shown on the Remote Touch screen. The image shows pedestrians, obstacles, and road conditions ahead of the vehicle, which are difficult to see at nighttime with the naked eye.

Displaying the Lexus night view

1

2

3

Turn the power switch to ON mode.

Turn the headlights on.

Press the Lexus night view switch.

The Lexus night view is displayed on the Remote Touch screen.

To return the screen to its previous state, press the switch again.

When the light sensor (

P. 216)

determines that it is currently night time from the brightness of the surrounding area, the Lexus night view can be operated by pressing the

Lexus night view switch while the headlights are on.

311

4

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

312

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The Lexus night view display

When displaying on the “Main Display” (

P. 330)

1

2

3

Lexus night view screen

“Side Display” switching button

If this button is selected using the Remote Touch when the Lexus night view is being shown on the “Main Display”, the “Side Display” will change to a map display. (

P. 328)

If the button is selected again, the screen will return to its previous display.

Brightness adjustment button

The brightness of the display can be adjusted by selecting this button using

Remote Touch.

Make sure to select the “OK” after adjusting the brightness.

“-”: Darker

“+”: Brighter

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ When displaying on the “Side Display”

2

1

When another screen is displayed on the “Main Display” while the Lexus night view is being shown on the

“Main Display”, the Lexus night view screen will be displayed on the “Side

Display”.

Lexus night view screen

“Main Display” switching button

Switches the Lexus night view from the “Side Display” to the “Main Display”.

■ Imaging range

The image is shown ranging from the tip of the low beam to the high beam.

313

4

■ If the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) when the Lexus night view is operating

An image will be displayed on the Lexus night view screen, but both the range and the distance of the projection will be limited as near-infrared rays are not being radiated outward.

■ When the Lexus night view switch is pressed while the Lexus night view cannot be operated

Advice information will be displayed on the Lexus night view screen. Follow the displayed advice.

■ If the Lexus night view switch is pressed at a time when the Lexus night view operation is not possible

Follow the advice displayed on the Remote Touch screen.

■ When the shift lever is shifted to R while the Lexus night view is operating

The Lexus night view screen switches as follows.

“Main Display”: Switches to the rear view monitor system screen.

“Side Display”: The display blacks out and no image is displayed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

314

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION

■ Before using the Lexus night view

Never depend on this system only.

Lexus night view is intended as a supplemental aid to help you see pedestrians and road conditions ahead of the vehicle. As there are limits to the system, do not rely solely on the system while in use, and drive safely while observing the following precautions.

■ When using the Lexus night view

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Never drive while looking at the Lexus night view screen only.

● Do not look continuously at the Lexus night view screen while driving. Pedestrians, objects etc. ahead of the vehicle may be overlooked by the system. The system should always be used as a supplemental aid only.

● Lexus night view is designed to help you see objects better when driving in darkness on a road with few curves. Do not use the Lexus night view in well-lit areas or on roads with many curves or slopes. There may be areas that cannot be displayed by the system due to the road conditions (curve size, gradient, etc.)

● Lexus night view may be unable to project some features at an appropriate level of brightness. Some or all parts of certain features may be dark or difficult to see.

Do not rely solely on the Lexus night view, and drive carefully while checking the surroundings for safety, as you would with a normal vehicle. Also, the following features and conditions may not be displayed clearly.

Features that are difficult to display:

• Clothing of a pedestrian made of a certain kind of material (ex. leather jackets)

• The characters on signs and billboards

• The information on road signs

Conditions in which display is difficult:

• Unfavorable weather conditions such as rain, fog, snowfall, snow storms etc.

• There are large puddles of water on the road surface following rainfall

• The area of the front windshield in front of the camera is fogged up, dirty or icy

• The areas around the headlights are covered with ice, snow, mud etc.

• The 12-volt battery voltage is remarkably low

• There are bright lights ahead of the vehicle

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

NOTICE

■ The near-infrared camera

Follow these precautions to avoid damage to or incorrect operation of the Lexus night view.

315

● Make sure the front windshield is kept clean.

● System performance may deteriorate if rain water, condensation or ice adheres to the camera. If you notice the inner lens of the camera is dirty, the garnish will have to be replaced. Consult your Lexus dealer.

● Do not subject the camera to strong impacts, or disassemble the camera.

● As the alignment of the camera has been very finely adjusted, do not change or remove the mounting.

● If the front windshield fogs up, defog the windshield using the front defroster.

● Do not dirty or scratch the camera lens.

● Night view may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

316

4-5. Using the driving support systems

NOTICE

■ The near-infrared light

Follow these precautions to avoid damage to or incorrect operation of the Lexus night view system

● System performance may deteriorate if the areas around the headlights are dirty. Clean the vehicle if it is dirty.

● The near-infrared light irradiates strong energy not visible to the eyes. Do not stare at the light at close range for a long time.

 Vehicles with discharge headlights

 Vehicles with LED headlights

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-6. Driving tips

317

Hybrid vehicle driving tips

For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following points:

Using Eco drive mode

When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it is in normal conditions. In addition, the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel economy. (

P. 286)

■ Use of Hybrid System Indicator

The Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the indicate of Hybrid

System Indicator within Eco area. (

P. 92)

When braking the vehicle

Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in good time. A greater amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.

Delays

Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic lights, will lead to bad fuel consumption. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When encountering a delay, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.

■ Highway driving

Control your speed and keep at a constant speed. Also, before stopping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

318

4-6. Driving tips

■ Air conditioning

Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.

In summer: In high temperatures, use the recirculated air mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioner and reduce fuel consumption as well.

In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until the gasoline engine and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor fuel consumption.

Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry roads can lead to poor fuel consumption. Use a tire that is appropriate for the season.

■ Luggage

Carrying heavy luggage can lead to poor fuel consumption. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack can also cause poor fuel consumption.

■ Warming up before driving

Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to poor fuel consumption.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-6. Driving tips

319

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Preparation for winter

● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil

• Engine/power control unit coolant

• Washer fluid

● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery.

● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the rear tires.

Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

320

4-6. Driving tips

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.

Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.

● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.

● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-6. Driving tips

Selecting tire chains

2

1

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain

(0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter)

Cross chain

(0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter)

321

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

322

4-6. Driving tips

Shifting the windshield wiper position

If heavy snow or icy condition is expected, shift the rest position manually.

Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper position.

■ To rest position

Raise the wiper in line with the windshield.

You can stand the wipers up for the rest position.

★: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm)

To retract position

Lower the wipers by pressing on the upper part of the hook section.

■ Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:

● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

● Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.

● Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving

1/4  1/2 mile (0.5  1.0 km).

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-6. Driving tips

323

CAUTION

■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the specified size.

● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.

● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

● Do not use LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system.

■ Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, as well as sudden braking and shifting operation to engine braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

● Do not use LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system.

4

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

324

4-6. Driving tips

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■ Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

■ When standing the windshield wipers up

Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (

P. 322)

Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-6. Driving tips

325

4

326

Interior features

5

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch..............................328

Remote Touch screen.............. 330

Set up screen ...............................336

Voice command system ..........353

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Front automatic

air conditioning system.........364

Rear air conditioning

system ..........................................379

Rear window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers.......... 384

Windshield wiper de-icer ...... 385

5-3. Using the audio system

Audio system type.....................386

Using the radio............................409

Using the CD/DVD player....433

Playing an audio CD

and MP3/WMA discs .........435

Playing DVD video......................441

CD/DVD player and DVD

video disc information...........453

Listening to

Bluetooth ®

audio ...................465

Listening to

a USB memory ........................ 475

Listening to an iPod...................485

Optimal use of

the audio/video system.........495

Using the AUX port ..................497

Using the rear seat

audio controls...........................498

Using the steering wheel

audio switches..........................503

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

327

Interior features

5

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone)................ 506

Using a Bluetooth ®

phone .....515

Setting the hands-free system

(for cellular phone)................ 534

Setting the Bluetooth ®

........... 558

5-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list........................... 571

• Interior light ............................ 572

• Personal lights........................ 572

5-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features..............574

• Glove box.................................576

• Console box........................... 577

• Cup holders............................578

• Auxiliary boxes.....................580

Trunk features ...............................581

5-7. Other interior features

Sun visors

and vanity mirrors ...................583

Clock...............................................584

Ashtrays........................................ 585

Power outlets ...............................586

Heated steering wheel ........... 588

Seat heaters/

seat ventilators .........................590

Armrest..........................................593

Rear sunshade/

rear door sunshades..............594

Coat hooks................................... 597

Assist grips....................................598

Utility hook....................................599

Garage door opener............... 600

Safety Connect...........................607

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

328

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch

The Remote Touch can be used to operate the Remote Touch screens.

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

The illustration below is for vehicles without navigation system.

1

2

4

3

“ •” button

Press this button to change map scale and scroll through lists.

“COMPASS” button

Press this button to display the compass mode screen.

Remote Touch knob

Use this knob to move the cursor and select items on the screen.

Feedback force, pointer sound volume, on or off of selection sounds etc. can be changed.

“MENU” button

Press to display the “Menu” screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

329

CAUTION

■ When using the Remote Touch

● Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Remote Touch as this may cause an injury.

● Be careful when selecting the Remote Touch in extreme temperatures as it may become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the Remote Touch

● Do not allow the Remote Touch to come into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange odor or stop functioning.

● Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact as the knob may bend or break off.

● Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the

Remote Touch as this may cause it to stop functioning.

● Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Remote Touch knob.

● If your hand or any object is on the Remote Touch knob when the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode, the Remote Touch knob may not operate properly.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

330

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch screen

By using the Remote Touch, you can control the audio system and air conditioning system, and adjust the screen display etc.

Vehicles with a navigation system: Different information can be displayed on the left and right of the screen. The 8-inch display area on the left of the screen is called the “Main Display”, and the area to the right is called the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the “Navigation System

Owner’s Manual”.

“Menu” screen

Vehicles without navigation system

Vehicles with a navigation system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Switch

“Destination”

“Info/Apps” or “Info”

“Setup”

“Radio”

“Media”

“Climate”

“Phone”

“Display”

Initial screen

If the power switch is turned to

ACCESSORY or ON mode, the initial screen will be displayed for a few seconds as the system starts up.

Images shown on the initial screen can be changed to suit individual preferences. (

P. 341)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Page

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

P. 109/

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

P. 336

P. 386, 409

P. 386, 435

P. 364

P. 506

P. 332

331

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

332

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Adjusting the display

The contrast and brightness of the screen display and the image the camera displays can be adjusted. (For information regarding audio/video screen adjustment:

P. 447)

1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and select “Display” on the “Menu” screen.

2 Select “Map•Menu” /“Menu” or “Camera” to display the desired screen.

Display screen (“Map•Menu”/

“Menu”)

If the map menu adjust screen does not appear, select “Map•Menu”/

“Menu”.

Display screen (“Camera”)

If the camera adjust screen does not appear, select “Camera”.

3 Select “<” or “>” to select the desired function (“Contrast” or “Brightness”) and then select the desired screen button to adjust contrast and brightness.

“Contrast”

“Brightness”

“-”

Weaker

Darker

4 After adjusting the screen, select “OK”.

“+”

Stronger

Brighter

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

333

■ When using the Remote Touch screen

● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operating slightly slower than normal.

● When the screen is viewed through polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern may appear on the screen due to optical characteristics of the screen. If this is disturbing, please operate the screen without polarized sunglasses.

● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.

■ Changing between day mode and night mode

To display the screen in day mode, even with the headlight switch on, select “Day Mode” for brightness and contrast control.

If the screen is set to day mode with the headlight switch turned on, this condition is memorized even with the hybrid system turned off.

The display condition is not changed to night mode even if the headlight switch is turned on when the vehicle is in a bright area such as daytime.

■ To turn off the display

The display goes off when “Screen Off” is selected. To turn the “Display” screen back on, select any button. The selected screen appears.

5

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the Remote Touch screen

Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners to clean the screen, as they may damage the Remote Touch screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

334

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Inputting letters and numbers/list screen operation

Letters and numbers can be input via the screen.

■ To input letters and numbers/symbols

Select the keys directly to enter letters, numbers or symbols.

Letters and numbers

Symbols

: Select to erase one character. Select and hold to continue erasing characters.

“A-Z”: To change letters and numbers

“Other”: To display symbols

: To enter in lower case

: To enter in upper case

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ Layout type

Keyboard layout can be changed. (

P. 341)

“ABC” type

“QWERTY” type

335

■ List screen operation

When a list is displayed, use the appropriate screen button to scroll through the list.

: Select to skip to the next or previous page. Select and hold

or to scroll through the displayed list.

: This indicates the displayed screen’s position.

:If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the display.

Select to scroll to the end of the name. Select to move to the beginning of the name.

■ If you select

The display returns to the previous screen.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

336

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Set up screen

You can change the Remote Touch screen to your desired settings.

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

Vehicles without navigation system

Vehicles with a navigation system

“General”

“Voice”

“Navigation”

“Vehicle”

“Phone”

“Bluetooth

*

“Audio”

“Other”

Switch Page

P. 337/

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

P. 349/

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

P. 350/

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

P. 351

P. 351

P. 352

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

337

General settings

6

4

2

3

This screen is used for language selection and the on/off settings of operation sounds and automatic screen change, etc.

1

Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.

System time settings

Selecting a language

Unit of measurement

*

1

5

Selecting a button color

Selecting keyboard layout

Changing the startup image

7

8

9

10

Changing the screen off image

Auto screen change

*

1

Selection sound on/off

Pointer sound on/off

11

12

13

Error sound on/off

Pointer sound volume settings

Setting a feedback force

14

15

16

Delete personal data

Software update

*

2

Gracenote database update

*

2

Select “Save” after changing settings.

*

1 : Vehicles with a navigation system.

*

2 : For details, contact your Lexus dealer.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

338

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ System time settings

Used for changing time zones and the on/off settings of daylight saving time.

1

2

2

1

Select “System Time” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select the items to be set.

Time zone

Daylight saving time

3 Select “Save”.

● Time zone

A time zone can be selected and GMT can be set.

1 Select “Time Zone”.

2 Select the desired time zone.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

If “Other” is selected, the zone can be adjusted manually. Select

“+” or “-” to adjust the time zone and then select “OK”.

5-1. Remote Touch screen

339

● Daylight saving time

To select “On” or “Off” for daylight saving time.

■ Selecting a language

The language can be changed.

1

2

Select “Language” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select the desired screen button.

5

3

4

Select “Yes”.

The previous screen will be displayed.

Select “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

340

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ Unit of measurement (vehicles with a navigation system)

Distance unit can be changed.

This function is available only in English or Spanish. To change language, see “Selecting a language”. (

P. 339)

1

2

Select “Unit of Measurement” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select “km” or “mile”.

The previous screen will be displayed.

3 Select “Save”.

Selecting a button color

The color of the screen buttons can be changed.

1

2

Select “Button Color” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select the desired screen button color.

The previous screen will be displayed.

3 Select “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ Selecting a keyboard layout

Keyboard layout can be changed.

1 Select “Keyboard Layout” on the “General Settings” screen.

2 Select “ABC” or “QWERTY”.

The previous screen will be displayed.

341

3 Select “Save”.

■ Changing the startup image (vehicles without a navigation system)

An image can be copied from a USB memory and used as the startup image.

When saving the images to a USB memory, name the folder that the startup image is saved to “StartupImage”. If these folder names are not used, the system cannot download the images. (The folder names are case sensitive.)

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

342

5-1. Remote Touch screen

● Transferring data

1 Open the console box.

2 Open the cover and connect a

USB memory.

Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on.

3

4

5

Close the console box.

Select “Customize Startup Image” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select “Transfer”.

6 Select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

343

● Setting the startup image

1 Select “Customize Startup Image” on the “General Settings” screen.

2 Select the desired image.

3

2

Select “Save”.

● Deleting transferred image

1 Select “Customize Startup Image” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select “Delete All”.

5

3 Select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

344

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ Changing the screen off image

Select “Screen Off” on the “Display” screen to turn off the screen. An image can be copied from a USB memory and can be set to display when “Screen Off” is selected.

When saving the images to a USB memory, name the folder that the screen off image is saved to “DisplayOffImage”. If these folder names are not used, the system cannot download the images. (The folder names are case sensitive.)

● Transferring data

1 Open the console box.

2 Open the cover and connect a

USB memory.

Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on.

3

4

Close the console box.

Select “Customize Screen Off Image” on the “General Settings” screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5 Select “Transfer”.

5-1. Remote Touch screen

345

6

2

Select “Yes”.

● Setting the screen off image

1 Select “Customize Screen Off Image” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select the desired image.

5

3 Select “Save”.

● Deleting transferred images

1 Select “Customize Screen Off Image” on the “General Settings” screen.

2 Select “Delete All”.

3 Select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

346

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ Pointer sound volume settings

The pointer sound volume can be adjusted.

1 Select “Pointer Sound Volume” on the “General settings” screen.

2 Select the desired button.

3 Select “OK”, and then “Save”.

■ Setting a feedback force

When the pointer moves close to a button, it will be automatically pulled onto that button. The strength of this pull can be adjusted.

1

2

Select “Feedback Force” on the “General settings” screen.

Select “+” or “-”.

3 Select “OK”, and then “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ Delete personal data

This function is not available while driving.

1 Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.

2 Select “Delete”.

Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted.

347

3 Select “Yes”.

The following personal data can be deleted or returned to their default settings:

• Maintenance conditions

*

• Maintenance information off setting

*

• Address book

*

• Areas to avoid

• Previous points

*

• Route guidance

• Route trace

*

*

*

• Phonebook data

• Call history data

• Speed dial data

• Bluetooth ® phone data

• Phone sound settings

• Phone display settings

• Message settings

• Audio setting

• Bluetooth ® audio setting

• Startup image data

• Screen off image data

*

: Vehicles with a navigation system.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

348

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ About startup or screen off images

● The images file extension is JPG or JPEG.

● The images file name, including the file extension, can be up to 32 characters.

● Image files of 10 MB or less can be saved.

● Up to 3 images can be downloaded.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Voice settings

2

3

4

1

Voice guidance can be set.

Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.

Select voice guidance volume

Voice guidance on/off during route guidance

*

Voice guidance on/off during audio system is in use

Voice recognition prompt on/off

5

6

7

8

This setting can also be changed on the “Shortcut Menu” screen.

(

P. 361)

Restore default settings

Voice commands on/off when using the audio/video and air conditioning system

Voice guidance on/off when using the traffic information*

Voice guidance on/off when using the XM NavWeather™*

Make sure to save after changing settings.

*

: Vehicles with a navigation system.

5-1. Remote Touch screen

349

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

350

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ Voice volume

The voice guidance volume can be adjusted or switched off.

1 Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.

2 Select the desired level.

Vehicles with a navigation system:

If voice guidance is not needed, select “Off” to disable the feature.

3 Select “Save”.

Vehicle settings

2

3

1

Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.

Maintenance information settings

Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s

Manual”.

Vehicle customization

Detailed information:

P. 809

Setting up intuitive parking assist

Detailed information:

P. 269

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Phone settings

1

2

3

4

Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

Phone sound settings

Detailed information:

P. 535

Phonebook settings

Detailed information:

P. 537

Message settings

Detailed information:

P. 551

Phone display settings

Detailed information:

P. 555

Bluetooth

®

Settings

2

3

4

1

Select “Bluetooth

*

” on the “Setup” screen.

Registered devices

Detailed information:

P. 559

Selecting a Bluetooth ® phone

Detailed information:

P. 565

Selecting portable player

Detailed information:

P. 566

Detailed Bluetooth ® settings

Detailed information:

P. 567

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

351

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

352

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Audio settings

1

2

Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.

HD Radio™ system settings

Detailed information:

P. 414

iPod settings

Detailed information:

P. 488

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

353

Voice command system

The voice command system enables the navigation, audio/video, hands-free and air conditioning systems to be operated using voice commands.

For details of the navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System

Owner’s Manual”.

◆ Talk switch

Press .

To cancel, press and hold the talk switch.

5

◆ Back switch

Press .

To return to the previous screen.

◆ Microphone

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

354

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Voice command system operation

■ Voice command system operation

1 Press .

After the “Shortcut Menu” screen has been displayed, voice guidance will commence.

Voice guidance for the voice command system can be skipped by pressing

.

2 After a beep sounds, say the command of your choice.

Voice commands are marked with

.

Some commonly used commands are displayed on the screen.

If you wish to display the commands displayed on the page in the background, perform one of the following:

• Say “Next page” or “Previous page”.

• Select “Next Pg.” or “Prev. Pg.”

If you wish to display the “Main

Menu” screen when the “Shortcut

Menu” screen is displayed, perform one of the following:

• Say “Main menu”.

• Select “Main Menu”.

To cancel, select “Cancel”, or press and hold .

Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands and operation methods.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

355

3 Say the command displayed on the screen.

If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no selections are available, perform one of the following to return to the previous screen:

• Say “Go back”.

• Select “Go Back”.

• Press .

To cancel, select “Cancel”, or press and hold .

Voice command example (search for a track using artist name or album name)

1 Press .

2

3

“Play Artist <name>” and “Play Album <name>” are displayed in the “Shortcut

Menu” screen.

Say “Play artist <name>” or “Play album <name>”.

Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.

A confirmation screen will be displayed showing the recognition results. If multiple matching items are found, a selection screen will be displayed.

When “Play Artist <name>” is used to play music, the first track is selected randomly.

Say “Yes” or select “Yes”.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

356

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Natural speech information (English only)

Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the system cannot recognize every variation of each command. In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the procedure and directly state the desired operation. Not all voice commands are displayed in the short cut menu.

Expression examples for each function

Command

“Call <name> <type>”

“Dial <number>”

“Play Artist <name>”

“Play Album <name>”

Expression examples

Get me <Robert Brown>.

I need to call <Robert Brown> at <Work> right away.

Please dial the number

<3334445555>.

Ring <3334445555>.

Play the artist <XXXXX>.

I’d like to hear the band <XXXXX>.

*

Play album <XXXXX>.

Music from album <XXXXX>.

*

*

: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.

Commands that are not displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen can be accessed from the main menu.

For example, to make an “International Call”, say “Main menu” while the “Shortcut Menu” screen is being displayed. Then say “Use the phone” followed by saying the desired number, e.g. “123456789”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

357

Expanded voice commands

Selecting “On” next to “Expanded Voice Commands” on the “Voice Settings” screen enables voice command operation of the audio/video and air conditioning system. (

P. 349)

For more information on operations that can be controlled using expanded voice commands, refer to “Command list”. (

P. 358)

■ Voice command example (turn the audio system)

1 Press .

2 Say “Audio on”.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

358

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Command list

Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.

● For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands may not be displayed in the “Shortcut

Menu” screen.

● Voice recognition language can be changed. (

P. 339)

● Commands that have a “O” in the “Shortcut Menu” column in the following table can be recognized from the “Shortcut Menu” screen.

Commands that have a “—” in the Shortcut Menu column can only be recognized from the screen that they are displayed in.

■ Calling a phone (

P. 520)

Command Action

Shortcut

Menu

“Call <name> <type>”

“Dial <number>”

“International Call”

*

Calls made by saying a name from the phonebook.

For example: Say “Call John Smith”,

“Call John Smith, mobile” etc.

Calls made by saying the phone number.

For example: Say “Dial 911”, “Dial

5556667777” etc.

Calls international numbers by saying the phone number.

O

O

*

: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Use the phone” while the “Shortcut Menu” screen is being displayed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

359

■ Playing a music

Command Action

Shortcut

Menu

“Play Artist <name>”

“Play Album <name>”

“Play Song <name>”

“Play Playlist

<name>”

*

2

*

2

Plays tracks by the selected artist.

For example: Say “Play artist

<XXXXX>”

*

1

Plays tracks from the selected album.

For example: Say “Play album

<XXXXX>”

*

1

Plays the selected track.

For example: Say “Play song Summertime”, “Play song Concerto in A Major” etc.

Plays tracks from the selected playlist.

For example: Say “Play playlist My

Favorite Songs”, “Play Playlist Classic

Hits” etc.

O

O

*

1

: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.

*

2 : To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Play music” while the “Shortcut menu” screen is being displayed.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

360

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ Select audio mode

When expanded voice commands are turned “On”. (

P. 349)

Command

“Radio”

“AM”

“FM”

“Satellite radio”

“Disc”

Action

Sets the audio mode to radio.

Selects the AM band.

Selects the FM band.

Selects the satellite radio mode.

Selects the disc audio mode.

“Auxiliary” Selects the auxiliary audio mode.

“Bluetooth

*

audio” Selects the Bluetooth ® audio mode.

“iPod” Selects the iPod audio mode.

“USB audio”

“Audio on”

“Audio off”

Selects the USB audio mode.

Turns the audio system on.

Turns the audio system off.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

■ Air conditioning system command

When expanded voice commands are turned “On”. (

P. 349)

Shortcut

Menu

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

Command Action

Shortcut

Menu

“Automatic climate control”

“Warmer”

“Cooler”

Turns air conditioning system on and off.

Turns temperature up.

Turns temperature down.

O

O

O

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

361

■ Voice command system

● Commands that are not displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen can be operated from the “Main Menu” screen.

● If the system does not respond or the confirmation screen does not disappear, press and try again.

● Voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting when it is desirable to say a command immediately after pressing a beep.

and hearing

■ If a voice command cannot be recognized

● If a voice command cannot be recognized within 6 seconds, voice guidance will say “Pardon?” (“Command not recognized.” will be displayed on the screen) and voice command reception will restart.

● If a voice command cannot be recognized 2 consecutive times, the voice command guidance system will say “Paused. To restart voice recognition, push the talk switch. To cancel voice recognition, push and hold the talk switch.” Voice recognition will then be suspended. Select “Cancel” or “Go Back”, or press .

■ When selecting “Voice Prompts”

● The voice recognition prompt can be set to on or off. This setting can also be changed on the “Voice Settings” screen. (

P. 349)

● Voice recognition will be temporarily suspended. Press again.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

362

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ When using the microphone

● It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command.

● Wait for the confirmation beep before speaking a command.

● Voice commands may not be recognized if:

• Spoken too quickly.

• Spoken at a low or high volume.

• The roof or windows are open.

• Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken.

• The air conditioning speed is set high.

• The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone.

● In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not be possible:

• The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize.

• There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.

■ When searching for a track

● A USB memory or iPod must be connected to enable track searching and playback. (

P. 477, 487)

● When a USB memory or iPod is connected, recognition data is created so tracks can be searched using voice commands.

● Recognition data is updated under the following conditions:

• When the USB memory or iPod data has changed.

• When the voice recognition language is changed. (

P. 339)

● While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a track search cannot be performed using a voice command.

● While “Play Music” is displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen, say “Play Music” to display the music screen from which searching for a track using a voice command can be performed.

● When “Play Music” is dimmed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen, it is not possible to search for a track using a voice command. In this situation, reduce the amount of music data in the USB memory or iPod and update the recognition data to enable searching by voice command.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

363

■ Natural speech information

● The “Use the Phone” and “Play Music” commands displayed on the “Shortcut

Menu” screen can be operated using natural language speech recognition technology.

● If the command cannot be recognized completely, the command input screen will be displayed. (Search results will be shown based on the part of the command that was recognized.)

■ When turning the audio system or air conditioning system on

● Commands relating to operation of the audio/video and air conditioning systems can only be performed when the audio/video and air conditioning systems are turned on.

● Expanded voice commands can be recognized when the “Shortcut Menu” screen is displayed.

■ The Gracenote ® media database

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.

®

Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related

.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

364

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Front automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Vehicles with a navigation system: The air conditioning system can be displayed and operated on the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Climate” to display the air conditioning operation screen.

The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Without rear air conditioning system

365

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

366

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

With rear air conditioning system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

1

2

Fan speed control

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

3

4

5

6

7

Outside temperature

Right-hand front seat side temperature control

Right-hand front seat side temperature display

Front seat air outlet selector

Micro dust and pollen filter

DUAL/3-ZONE mode

8

9

10

Cooling and dehumidification function on/off

Left-hand front seat side temperature display

367

11

12

Left-hand front seat side temperature control

Windshield defogger

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

Outside air or recirculated mode

Air outlet selector

S-FLOW mode

Off

Automatic mode

Left-hand front seat side air outlet selector

Rear air conditioning operation screen

20

Right-hand front seat side air outlet selector

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

368

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Using the speech command system

Press to operate the speech command system. (

P. 353/“Nav-

igation System Owner’s Manual”)

Using the automatic air conditioning system

1 Press .

The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting and humidity.

2 Press to switch to automatic air intake mode.

The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.

3 Press “ ” on to increase the temperature and “ ” to decrease the temperature.

Without rear air conditioning system

When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

With rear air conditioning system

When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats (

P. 379) can be adjusted separately.

Air outlets and fan speed for the driver and passenger seats may be adjusted separately depending on the temperature setting.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the settings manually

Without rear air conditioning system

369

1 To adjust the fan speed, select “ ” on to increase the fan speed and “ ” to decrease the fan speed on the operation screen.

Press to turn the fan off.

2 To adjust the temperature setting, press “ ” on to increase the

3 temperature and “ ” to decrease the temperature.

When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

To change the air outlets, select an air outlet switch on the operation screen.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

370

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

With rear air conditioning system

1 To adjust the fan speed, select “ ” on to increase the fan speed and “ ” to decrease the fan speed on the operation screen.

Press to turn the fan off.

2 To adjust the temperature setting, press “ ” on to increase the

3 temperature and “ ” to decrease the temperature.

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is selected.

When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats (

P. 379) can be adjusted separately.

To change the air outlets, select an air outlet switch on the operation screen.

1

Left-hand front seat

2

Right-hand front seat

Different air outlets for the driver and front passenger seats can be chosen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Defogging the windshield

Press .

The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases.

Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.

To return to the previous mode, press again when the windshield is defogged.

[ Air outlets and air flow

Upper body

*

: In “AUTO” mode, air may flow to the feet as well as to the body to prevent your feet from getting sweaty.

*

*

Upper body and feet

371

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

372

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Feet

*

: When the warming function is operating, air flows to the upper body as well to warm the upper body effectively.

*

*

Feet and windshield

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches among (recirculated air mode), automatic and

(outside air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.

When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

373

Changing the rear seat settings (with rear air conditioning system)

■ Using the automatic mode

1 Select .

2 Select .

The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and speed will be set automatically.

3 Select to increase the temperature and to decrease the temperature.

Adjusting the temperature setting

1 Select .

2 Select  (increase) or

(decrease) on the operation screen.

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time

is selected.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

374

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Disabling the switches on the rear armrest.

Select .

Micro dust and pollen filter button

Operates micro dust and pollen filter on/off.

Outside air mode switches to

(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.

Usually the system will turn off automatically after approximately 1 to 3 minutes.

S-FLOW mode button

Operates S-FLOW mode on/off.

When the S-FLOW mode button is pressed, the airflow changes as follows.

Without rear air conditioning system:

Air flows to the front seats only.

With rear air conditioning system: Air flows to the front seats only, and if the passenger seat is unoccupied, the set temperature, outside humidity and temperature inside the cabin are assessed, and air flows to the driver seat only.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Front center outlets and front side outlets

1

2

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

375

5

2

1

■ Rear seat outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

376

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after is pressed.

■ Humidity sensor

A sensor, which detects humidity inside the vehicle and the temperature of the windshield, is provided to detect fog on the front windscreen. Due to the sensor, when automatic mode is set the air conditioning may make the following controls:

● Changing the amount of air flow

● Changing the amount of air introduced from outside when in outside air mode with the air vents in the position

● Changing the settings of the air vents to

when the is set

■ Fogging up of the windows

● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Selecting tively.

on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effec-

● If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.

● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■ Outside/recirculated air mode

● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/ recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.

● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

377

■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning system is on

● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.

● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the power switch is turned on.

● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

■ Automatic mode for air intake control

.

In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.

When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic mode on will activate the dehumidification function.

■ Micro dust and pollen filter

● In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the following may occur:

• Outside air mode does not switch to

• The dehumidification function operates.

(recirculated air) mode.

• The operation cancels after approximately 1 minute.

● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .

● In extremely humid weather, the windows may fog up.

● The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:

● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity

● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected

To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:

● Adjust the fan speed

● Turn off Eco drive mode

■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32 F (0C)

The dehumidification function may not operate even when is selected.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

378

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Air conditioning odors

● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

● To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.

■ Air conditioning filter

P. 666

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. exhaust gas sensor sensitivity) can be changed.

(Customizable features

P. 807)

CAUTION

■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

■ Humidity sensor

Follow these points to avoid damaging the sensor:

● Do not disassemble the sensor

● Do not spray the glass cleaner on the sensor or subject it to strong impacts

● Do not stick anything on the sensor

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear air conditioning system

379

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

1

2

4

3

Button lock display

Air outlet mode display

Temperature display

Temperature control

6

7

5

Air outlet selector

Off

Automatic mode

5

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

380

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Using automatic air conditioning system

1 Press .

The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and fan speed will be adjusted automatically.

“AUTO” will be displayed on the control panel.

2 Press “ ” on the temperature.

to increase the temperature and “ ” to decrease

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the settings manually

Adjusting the temperature setting

381

Press “ ” on to increase the temperature and “ ” to decrease the temperature.

■ Changing the air outlets

Press .

The air outlets change as follows each time is pressed.

Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.

Upper body

5

Upper body and feet

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

382

Feet

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

(Rear center outlets)

2

1

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Button lock function

To prevent inadvertent operation, the buttons on the rear armrest can be locked. Press

until you hear a beep to lock the buttons. Pressing again until you hear a beep will release the lock.

The indicator appears on the display when the buttons are locked.

■ Rear control panel illumination off function

Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. Press until you hear a beep to turn the illumination off. Pressing

again until you hear a beep will turn the illumination on.

383

NOTICE

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

384

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

On/off

The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.

■ Operating conditions

The power switch must be in the ON mode.

CAUTION

■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

NOTICE

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Turn the defoggers off when the hybrid system is off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Windshield wiper de-icer

385

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.

1

2

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (

P. 328)

Select “Climate” on the “Menu” screen.

3 ON/OFF

Select to turn on the windshield wiper de-icer. The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes. Selecting

again also turns the de-icer off.

■ Operating conditions

The power switch must be in the ON mode.

CAUTION

■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on

Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.

5

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

386

5-3. Using the audio system

Audio system type

CD and DVD player with AM/FM radio

Vehicles with a navigation system: The audio functions can be displayed and operated on the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the “Navigation

System Owner’s Manual”.

Using the instrument panel

Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.

Using the Remote Touch

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, select “Radio” or

“Media” and select each tab to display the audio control screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

387

5

388

5-3. Using the audio system

Title

Using the radio

Using the CD/DVD player

Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs

Playing DVD video

CD/DVD player and DVD video disc information

Listening to Bluetooth ® audio

Listening to a USB memory

Listening to an iPod

Optimal use of the audio/video system

Using the AUX port

Using the steering wheel audio switches

Using the voice command system

Press to operate the voice command system. (

P. 353“Nav-

igation System Owner’s Manual”)

Page

P. 409

P. 433

P. 435

P. 441

P. 453

P. 465

P. 475

P. 485

P. 495

P. 497

P. 503

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

389

■ Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

■ When using the Remote Touch screen

Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.

■ Tab

Select or , located either side of the screen tabs, to display tabs from the previous or next page.

■ About Dolby

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

CAUTION

■ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada

● Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

● Laser products

• USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PRO-

CEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN

HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

• THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL

INCREASE EYE HAZARD.

5

NOTICE

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

■ To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

390

5-3. Using the audio system

■ Open source license

This product uses the following open source software.

● T-Kernel

This Product uses the Source Code of T-Kernel under T-License granted by the

T-Engine Forum (www.t-engine.org).

● C Library

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. This product includes software developed by the University of

California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory.

Copyright © 1982, 1985, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.

All rights reserved.

© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and

Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.

Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of

California. All rights reserved.

© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and

Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.

Copyright © 1983, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and

Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.

Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1987, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1987, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1988 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1988 University of Utah.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

391

Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by the Systems

Programming Group of the University of Utah Computer Science Department and

Ralph Campbell.

Copyright © 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Arthur

David Olson of the National Cancer Institute.

Copyright © 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and

Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.

Copyright © 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and

Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.

Copyright © 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.

Copyright © 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Berkeley Software

Design, Inc.

Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Ralph Campbell.

Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

392

5-3. Using the audio system

© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and

Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.

Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

This software was developed by the Computer Systems Engineering group at

Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory under DARPA contract BG 91-66 and contributed to Berkeley. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory.

Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Ralph Campbell. This file is derived from the MIPS RISC Architecture book by Gerry Kane.

Copyright © 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Andrew Hume of

AT&T Bell Laboratories.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

393

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS

“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1983, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

394

5-3. Using the audio system

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS

“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment

Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the document or software without specific, written prior permission.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP.

DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,

INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE

LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS

OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN

CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.

All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

395

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS

“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors.

Copyright © 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by J.T.

Conklin.

Copyright © 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus

Klein.

Copyright © 1997, 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1997,98 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by J.T.

Conklin.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

396

5-3. Using the audio system

Copyright © 1997, 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.

This code was contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus Klein.

Copyright © 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus

Klein.

Copyright © 1998, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus

J. Klein.

Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Julian

Coleman.

Copyright © 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Dieter

Baron and Thomas Klausner.

Copyright © 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by

Jun-ichiro itojun Hagino and by Klaus Klein.

Copyright © 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus

Klein.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

397

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT

OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY

OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.

Copyright © 1997 Christos Zoulas. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by

Christos Zoulas.

4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

398

5-3. Using the audio system

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN

CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.

Copyright © 1994 Winning Strategies, Inc. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by

Winning Strategies, Inc.

4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

399

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN

CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS

“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Copyright ©1999 Citrus Project, All rights reserved.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

400

5-3. Using the audio system

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS

“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Copyright © 1995 Carnegie-Mellon University. All rights reserved. Author: Chris

G. Demetriou

Copyright © 1995, 1996 Carnegie-Mellon University. All rights reserved. Author:

Chris G. Demetriou

Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation is hereby granted, provided that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software, derivative works or modified versions, and any portions thereof, and that both notices appear in supporting documentation.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

401

CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS ““AS

IS”” CONDITION. CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF

ANY KIND FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE

USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

Carnegie Mellon requests users of this software to return to Software Distribution

Coordinator or [email protected] School of Computer

Science Carnegie Mellon University Pittsburgh PA 15213-3890 any improvements or extensions that they make and grant Carnegie the rights to redistribute these changes.

● TCP/IP, Socket Library

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

Copyright © 1980, 1983, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.

All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1983, 1987, 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1983, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1985, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1985, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 1989, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

402

5-3. Using the audio system

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS

“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Copyright © 2004 by Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. (““ISC””) Portions

Copyright © 1996-1999 by Internet Software Consortium. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL

WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO

EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER

RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN

ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,

ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR

PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment

Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the document or software without specific, written prior permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

403

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP.

DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,

INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE

LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS

OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN

CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

This product includes software developed by WIDE Project and its contributors.

Portions Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by

WIDE Project and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

404

5-3. Using the audio system

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS

“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Copyright © 1988 Stephen Deering.

Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. [rescinded 22 July 1999]

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS

“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1988 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

405

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California,

Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE.

Rights, responsibilities and use of this software are controlled by the agreement found in the ““LICENSE.H”” file distributed with this source code. ““LICENSE.H”” may not be removed from this distribution, modified, enhanced nor references to it omitted.

Copyright 1983 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Copyright 1984 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Copyright 1984, 1985 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Copyright 1990 by NetPort Software

Copyright 1990-1993 by NetPort Software.

Copyright 1990-1994 by NetPort Software.

Copyright 1990-1996 by NetPort Software.

Copyright 1990-1997 by NetPort Software.

Copyright 1993 by NetPort Software

Copyright 1986 by Carnegie Mellon

All Rights Reserved

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

406

5-3. Using the audio system

● OpenSSL

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the

OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

OpenSSL License

Copyright © 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the

OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.

(http://www.openssl.org/)”

4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].

5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may

“OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the

OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL

Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

407

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND

ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson

([email protected]).

Original SSLeay License

Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).

The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

408

5-3. Using the audio system

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT

OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY

OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

409

Using the radio

Press the “RADIO” button to display the radio control screen.

Select the “AM”, “FM”, “SAT” or “Apps” tab or press the “RADIO” button repeatedly to select the desired tab.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

410

5-3. Using the audio system

1

2

4

6

3

5

AM/FM/SAT/Apps mode tabs

Scanning for receivable stations

Setting the sound (

P. 495)

Mute

Adjusting the frequency

Preset turning/seeking the frequency

7

8

9

10

AM/FM/SAT/Apps mode button

Power

Volume

Preset stations

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting a station (excluding XM

®

Satellite Radio)

Seek tuning

Press and hold “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.

■ Manual tuning

Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob.

Preset stations

Select the desired preset stations (1 - 6).

Change the page by using “ ” or “” on the screen.

Press “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.

Setting station presets (excluding XM

®

Satellite Radio)

1

2

Search for desired stations.

Select one of the left side screen buttons (1-6) and hold it until a beep is heard. There are 6 sets of

6 presets. There is a total of 36 presets.

411

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

412

5-3. Using the audio system

Scanning radio stations (excluding XM

®

Satellite Radio)

2

1

Scanning all radio stations within range

Select “SCAN” on the screen.

“SCAN” appears on the screen.

The radio will find the next station and stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or “HD

Only” is selected, or 5 seconds if “Analog” is selected, and then scan again.

(

P. 414)

Select “SCAN” once again when the desired station is reached.

RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data Systems)

This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which broadcast this information.

Receiving RBDS broadcasts

1 Select “Options” on the screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2 Select “< TYPE” or “TYPE >” on the screen.

5-3. Using the audio system

413

The program list changes as follows each time the switch is selected.

• Classical

• Country

• EasyLis (Easy Listening)

• Inform (Information)

• Jazz

• News

• Oldies

• Other

• Pop Music

• Religion

• Rock

• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)

• Sports

• Talk

• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio Settings” are set to analog.)

• Alert (Emergency Alert)

When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.

3 Select “TYPE SEEK” on the screen.

The radio seeks for stations by the relevant program type.

If no relevant program can be found, “no type” appears on the screen.

■ Traffic announcement

Select “Traffic” on the screen.

“TRAF SEEK” appears on the display, and the radio seeks a traffic program station.

If no traffic program station is found, “No Traffic” appears on the display.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

414

5-3. Using the audio system

HD Radio™ system

Settings HD Radio™ system

HD Radio™ system can be set using the procedure outlined below.

1

2

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

Select “Audio”.

3 Select “HD Radio Settings”.

4 Select “HD Radio/Analog Setting”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5 Select the item to be set.

“All”: Select to receive both analog and digital broadcasts.

“HD Only”: Select to receive only digital broadcasts.

6

“Analog”: Select to receive only analog broadcasts.

Select “Save”.

Trademark owned

5-3. Using the audio system

415

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity

Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

416

5-3. Using the audio system

HD Radio™ Technology

HD Radio™ Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio.

Your radio product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives.

Digital broadcasts have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts provide free, crystal clear audio with no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available radio stations and programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

■ Using HD Radio™ Technology

1 Press the “RADIO” button.

2 Select the “AM” or “FM” tab or press the “RADIO” button repeatedly to select the desired tab.

3

An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be displayed on the screen when in digital.

The song title, artist name and music genre will appear on the screen when available by the radio station.

Select “Options” to display this screen.

When “Text” is selected, information such as the artist name, song title, album title and music genre of the track being listened to are displayed on the text screen. To display messages from the station, select “Additional Information”.

When “< TYPE” or “TYPE >” is selected, a program type will be searched. Once a program type has been set, “TYPE SEEK” will appear on the screen. (

P. 412)

5-3. Using the audio system

417

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

418

5-3. Using the audio system

Available HD Radio™ Technology

On the FM radio frequency most digital stations have “multiple” or supplemental programs on one FM station.

■ Multicast

Select “Multicast”.

Each time “Multicast” is selected, the supplemental program changes.

1

If “Multicast” is selected when tuned to the last of the supplemental programs, the main program will be returned to.

Tag

Select “Tag” to bookmark the music information.

1

2 Open the console box, open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable. (

P. 487)

Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.

Once an iPod is connected, the music tag moves from the radio into the iPod.

When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the “tagged” information of the songs which were tagged while listening to the radio can be viewed. Then a user may decide to purchase the song or CD/Album which had been listened to on their radio.

If tagging the music information fails, “Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will be displayed on the screen. If this occurs, tag the information again.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

XM

®

Satellite Radio

Receiving XM ® Satellite Radio

1 Press the “RADIO” button.

2 Select the “SAT” tab or press the “RADIO” button repeatedly until the “SAT” tab is selected to choose a satellite broadcast channel.

5-3. Using the audio system

419

3 Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to select the next or previous channel.

Turning the knob quickly allows rapid scrolling through the channel list.

Presetting XM ® Satellite Radio channels

1 Select the desired channel.

2 Select one of the left side screen buttons (1-6) and hold it until a beep is heard.

To change the preset channel to a different one, follow the same procedure.

5

■ Changing the channel category

Select either “< TYPE” or “TYPE

>” to go to the next or previous category.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

420

5-3. Using the audio system

■ Seeking the channel within the current category

Press and hold “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.

Scanning XM ® Satellite Radio channels

Scanning channels in the current category

1 Select “SCAN” on the screen.

2

“SCAN” appears on the screen.

Select “SCAN” once again when the desired channel is reached.

Displaying the title and artist name

Select “Text” to display the song title and artist name currently being listening to.

Up to 64 alphanumeric characters can be displayed. (Some information will not be fully displayed.)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

421

Internet radio broadcast (vehicles with the navigation system)

2

1

One of Apps’ features is the ability to listen to internet radio. In order to use this service, an Apps compatible phone and the navigation system need to be set. For details, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

Press the “RADIO” button.

Select the “Apps” tab or press the

“RADIO” button repeatedly until the “Apps” tab is selected.

3

If a compatible phone is already registered, it will be connected automatically.

If a compatible phone has not been registered or the Bluetooth ® connection cannot be completed correctly, select “Connect” to register and/or connect your phone. (

P. 515)

When connection is complete, the application screen can be displayed.

Select “View Application Screen” on the screen.

The internet radio application screen is displayed.

Perform operations according to the displayed application screen.

By pressing the “RADIO” button, the “Audio” screen can be returned to.

5

Silencing the sound

Press .

Press the button again to turn the system back on.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

422

5-3. Using the audio system

■ If you select

The display returns to the previous screen.

■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected

All preset stations are erased.

■ Reception sensitivity

● Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of XM ® Satellite Radio.

● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.

■ HD Radio™ Technology troubleshooting guide

Action Experience

Mismatch of time alignment- a user may hear a short period of programming replayed or an echo, stutter or skip.

Cause

The radio stations analog and digital volume are not properly aligned or the station is in ballgame mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. A user can contact the radio station.

Sound fades, blending in and out.

Audio mute condition when an HD2/HD3 multicast channel had been playing.

Radio is shifting between analog and digital audio.

The radio does not have access to digital signals at the moment.

Reception issue, may clear-up as the vehicle continues to be driven.

Selecting “Analog” can force radio in an analog audio.

This is normal behavior, wait until the digital signal returns. If out of the coverage area, seek a new station.

Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/HD3 multicast channel preset.

The digital multicast content is not available until

HD Radio™ broadcast can be decoded and make the audio available.

This takes up to 7 seconds.

This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to become available.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Experience

Text information does not match the present song audio.

No text information shown for the present selected frequency.

Cause

Data service issue at the radio broadcaster.

Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.

Action

Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form: www.ibiquity.com/ automotive/ report_radio_station_ experiences.

Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form: www.ibiquity.com/ automotive/ report_radio_station_ experiences.

423

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

424

5-3. Using the audio system

■ XM Radio Services — Descriptions (vehicles without a navigation system for

U.S.A.)

● Radio and Entertainment

XM offers more than 170 satellite radio channels of commercial-free music and premier sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to millions of listeners across the continental United States. XM subscribers listen to

XM on satellite radio receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More information about XM is available online at www.siriusxm.com.

● Satellite tuner

The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying

Text Information of XM

®

Satellite Radio.

■ XM Radio Services — Subscription Instructions (vehicles without a navigation system for U.S.A.)

For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio), the following paragraph shall be included.

Required XM Radio monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions are subject to the Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com.

XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States. © 2011 Sirius XM

Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM

Radio Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners.

For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after complimentary trial period; more information is available at:

U.S.A. Customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987

● Radio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM

®

service or reporting a problem. If

“CH 000” is selected using the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob, the ID code, which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the ID code will no longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates between displaying the radio ID and the specific radio code.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

425

■ XM Radio Services — Legal Disclaimers and Warnings (vehicles without a navigation system for U.S.A.)

● Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change.

Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com. XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.

Explicit Language Notice — Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for

XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at;

U.S.A. Customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-515-3987

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the

Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE

®

voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

426

5-3. Using the audio system

■ XM Radio Services — Descriptions (vehicles without a navigation system for Canada)

● Radio and Entertainment

XM offers more than 170 satellite radio channels of commercial-free music and premier sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to millions of listeners across the continental United States. XM subscribers listen to

XM on satellite radio receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More information about XM is available online at www.xmradio.ca.

● Satellite tuner

The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying

Text Information of XM

®

Satellite Radio.

■ XM Radio Services — Subscription Instructions (vehicles without a navigation system for Canada)

For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio), the following paragraph shall be included.

Required XM Radio monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions are subject to the Customer Agreement available at www.xmradio.ca.

XM service only available in 10 Canadian provinces. © 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc.

Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners.

For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after complimentary trial period; more information is available at:

Canadian Customers:

Visit www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987

● Radio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM

®

service or reporting a problem. If

“CH 000” is selected using the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob, the ID code, which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the ID code will no longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates between displaying the radio ID and the specific radio code.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

427

■ XM Radio Services — Legal Disclaimers and Warnings (vehicles without a navigation system for Canada)

Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at www.xmradio.ca. XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada

*

.

*

Canada — some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern latitudes. This is beyond the control of XM Satellite Radio.

Explicit Language Notice — Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for

XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at;

Canadian Customers — Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-515-3987

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the

Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE

®

voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

428

5-3. Using the audio system

■ XM Radio Services — Descriptions (vehicles with a navigation system)

● Radio and Entertainment

XM offers more than 170 satellite radio channels of commercial-free music and premier sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to millions of listeners across the continental United States. XM subscribers listen to

XM on satellite radio receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More information about XM is available online at www.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada)

● Infotainment and Data services

XM offers a variety of advanced Infotainment and data services.

■ XM Radio Services — Subscription Instructions (vehicles with a navigation system)

For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio, and some Infotainment & data services), the following paragraph shall be included.

Required XM Radio and some Infotainment & data services monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions are subject to the Customer

Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada)

XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. © 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners.

For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after complimentary trial period; more information is available at:

 U.S.A. Customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987

 Canadian Customers:

Visit www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987

● Radio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM

®

service or reporting a problem. If

“CH 000” is selected using the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob, the ID code, which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the ID code will no longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates between displaying the radio ID and the specific radio code.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

429

■ XM Radio Services — Legal Disclaimers and Warnings (vehicles with a navigation system)

Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada) XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada

*

.

*

Canada — some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern latitudes. This is beyond the control of XM Satellite Radio.

Explicit Language Notice — Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for

XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at;

 U.S.A. Customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-515-3987

 Canadian Customers:

Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-515-3987

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the

Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE

®

voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

430

5-3. Using the audio system

■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally

If a problem occurs with the XM ® tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.

The XM ®

XM ®

antenna is not connected. Check whether the

antenna cable is attached securely.

Ck Antenna

There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.

You have not subscribed to XM ® Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.

Contact XM ® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose “CH

000” and all free-to-air channels.

Ch Unauth

No Signal

The premium channel you selected is not authorized.

Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH 001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listen to the premium channel, contact XM ® Satellite Radio.

The XM nal.

® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger sig-

Loading

The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information.

Ch Off Air

-----

Ch Unavail

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action is required.

The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH 001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

Contact the XM ® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

431

■ About internet radio (vehicles with the navigation system)

● Other applications can be activated while listening to internet radio.

● An iPhone cannot be connected via Bluetooth ® and USB connection at the same time. However, it is possible to recharge an iPhone while using Apps by connecting via USB. The system uses the connection method that was used last. Therefore, if connected via USB after Bluetooth iPhone via Bluetooth ® .

® connection, it is necessary to reconnect the

● Services requiring a separate contract can also be used. For details, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.

● If internet radio has never been listened to by activating “Apps” from the “Information” screen, the “Apps” tab will be dimmed.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

432

5-3. Using the audio system

■ Certifications for the radio tuner

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

● Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna.

● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.

● Consult the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Certifications for XM ® Satellite Radio

This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Using the CD/DVD player

433

1

2

4

3

5

Setting the sound (

P. 495)

Disc slot

Play/pause

Track/file selection

Track, file and chapter selection/fast forward/rewind

6

7

8

9

MEDIA button

Disc eject

Power

Volume

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5

434

5-3. Using the audio system

Inserting a disc

Insert a disc into the disc slot.

Ejecting a disc

Press and remove the disc.

Playing and pausing a track/file/chapter

To play or pause a track/file/chapter, press .

■ Using the display

● Under extremely cold conditions, the screen may react slowly or operation sound may become louder.

● If a disc is inserted with the label facing down, it cannot be played.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs

435

Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has already been loaded in the disc slot.

Select the “DISC” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the

“DISC” tab is selected.

Control icon screen

Audio CD mode

MP3/WMA discs mode

5

1

2

4

6

3

5

Random playback

Repeat play

Pause

Select to play

Setting the sound (

P. 495)

Selecting a track

Selecting a folder

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

436

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a track (Audio CD)

Selecting a track

Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous track.

Press “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE/

SCROLL” knob to select the desired track number.

Selecting a track from the track list

1 Select the track name on the screen to display the CD’s track list.

2 Select the desired track number.

, : Select to move the list up or down by 5 track groups.

“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or

“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to scroll through the track list one by one.

“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the track list.

, : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name.

Select to move to the beginning of the name.

Fast forwarding or rewinding a track

To fast forward or rewind, press and hold “<” or “>” on the

“PRST•TRACK” button.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

437

Selecting a folder (MP3/WMA discs)

Selecting a folder

Select “ < ” or “ > ” on the screen to select the next/previous folder.

■ Selecting a folder from the folder list

1 Select the folder name on the screen to display the following folder list screen.

2 Select the desired folder number to display the folder’s file list. From the file list, select the desired file number.

, : Select to move the list up or down by 5 folder groups.

“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the folder list.

, : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name.

Select to move to the beginning of the name.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

438

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a file (MP3/WMA discs)

Selecting a file

Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous file.

Press “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE/

SCROLL” knob to select the desired file number.

Selecting a file from the file list

1 Select the file name on the screen to display the following file list screen.

2 Select the desired file number.

, : Select to move the list up or down by 5 file groups.

“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or

“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to scroll through the file list one by one.

“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the file list.

, : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name.

Select to move to the beginning of the name.

Fast forwarding or rewinding a file

To fast forward or rewind, press and hold “<” or “>” on the

“PRST•TRACK” button.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

439

Random playback

Audio CD

Select “RAND” on the screen.

“RAND” appears on the screen.

To cancel, select “RAND” again.

■ MP3/WMA disc

● Playing files from a particular folder in random order

Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows: random (1 folder random)  folder random (1 disc random)  off

● Playing all the files on a disc in random order

Select “RAND” repeatedly until “FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.

To cancel, select “RAND” again.

When a file is skipped or the system is inoperative, select “RAND” to reset.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

440

5-3. Using the audio system

Repeating a track

Audio CD

Select “RPT” on the screen.

“RPT” appears on the screen.

To cancel, select “RPT” again.

■ MP3/WMA disc

● Repeating a file

Select “RPT” on the screen.

Each time is “RPT” selected, the mode changes as follows:

• When “RAND” is off file repeat  folder repeat  off

• When “RAND” is on file  repeat off

● Repeating all of the files in a folder

Select “RPT” repeatedly until “FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.

To cancel, select “RPT” again.

■ If you select

The display returns to the previous screen.

■ Displaying the title and artist name (Audio CD)

If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to

32 characters can be displayed.

■ Error messages

P. 453

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

441

Playing DVD video

For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the vehicle is completely stopped with the power switch in ACCES-

SORY or ON mode and the parking brake applied. While driving in

DVD video mode, only the DVD’s audio can be heard.

When a DVD video disc is inserted while driving, the audio contents of the main feature will automatically be played. However, some discs may not be played from the main story.

Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has already been loaded in the disc slot.

Select the “DISC” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the

“DISC” tab is selected.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

442

5-3. Using the audio system

Control icon screen

Vehicles without a navigation system

Vehicles with a navigation system

6

7

4

3

1 2 Menu screen appears

Option screen appears (

P. 443)

5

Display menu control key (

P. 444)

Returns to the full screen (only when the vehicle is completely stopped and the parking brake is applied)

Rewind

Stop

8

9

10

Pause

Select to play

Fast forward

Setting the sound (

P. 495)

If is selected, while watching a DVD, the DVD controls will appear.

If appears on the screen when a control is selected the operation relevant to the control is not permitted.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

443

DVD options screen

Select “Options” on “DVD” screen, the following screen appears.

Vehicles without a navigation system

Vehicles with a navigation system

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Returns to the full screen (only when the vehicle is completely stopped and the parking brake is applied)

Search by title/group number

Change audio language

Change angle

Display the predetermined scene and start playing from there

Change subtitle language

Change screen size

Display the image quality adjustment screen

9 Change initial setting

If appears on the screen when a control is selected the operation relevant to the control is not permitted.

Fast forwarding/rewinding a disc

Select and hold or on the control icon screen.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

444

5-3. Using the audio system

1

2

Using the DVD menu

Select “Menu” or “Top Menu” on the control icon screen.

Select if the menu control key does not appear on the menu screen.

Select the menu item using

, or and select

,

“Enter”.

: Returns to the previous screen

Note that specific items or the operating method differs from one DVD to another. Refer to the manual that comes with the DVD disc. (The above image is an example.)

Searching for a desired screen

■ Searching by title

1

2

Select “Search” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Input the desired title number and then select “OK”.

: Deletes the last input number

: Returns to the previous screen

■ Searching by chapter

Press “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE/

SCROLL” knob.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

1

2

Changing the subtitle language

Select “Subtitle” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Each time you select “Change”, the next available language is selected.

The languages available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc.

“Hide”:Hides the subtitles

: Returns to the previous screen

Changing the audio language

1

2

Select “Audio” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Each time you select “Change”, the next available language is selected.

The languages available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc.

: Returns to the previous screen

Changing the angle (if the angle option is available)

1

2

Select “Angle” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Each time you select “Change”, the next available angle is selected.

The angles available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc.

: Returns to the previous screen

445

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

446

5-3. Using the audio system

Changing screen size

1

2

2

3

Select “Wide” on the “DVD Options” screen.

1

Select the desired display. After setting, select “Save”.

Displays a 3 : 4 screen, with either side in black

Widens the 3 : 4 screen horizontally to fill the screen

Widens the 3 : 4 screen vertically and horizontally, in the same ratio, to fill the screen

: Returns to the previous screen

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

1

2

Adjusting the screen

Select “Display” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Select “<” or “>” to display the desired item to be adjusted, and then select “OK”.

The screen goes off when “Screen

Off” is selected. To turn the display screen back on, select any button. The selected screen appears.

Color

Tone

Contrast

Brightness

R

Red

+

Lighter

Weaker

Darker

G

Green

-

Darker

Stronger

Brighter

447

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

448

5-3. Using the audio system

Initial DVD settings

Displaying “DVD Settings” screen

1 Select “DVD Settings” on the “DVD Options” screen.

2 Select the setting to be changed.

After you change the settings, select “Save”.

“Default”: Restores default settings

: Returns to the previous screen

■ Setting audio language

1 Select “Audio Language” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

2 Select the desired language to be heard on the “Audio Language” screen.

1

If you cannot find the desired language, select “Other” and input the desired language code. (

P. 450)

■ Setting subtitle language

Select “Subtitle Language” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

2 Select the desired language to be read on the “Subtitle Language” screen.

If you cannot find the desired language, select “Other” and input the desired language code. (

P. 450)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

449

■ Setting menu language

1 Select “Menu Language” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

2 Select the desired language to be read on the “Menu Language” screen.

If you cannot find the desired language, select “Other” and input the desired language code. (

P. 450)

■ Setting angle mark

If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on or off.

1 Select “Angle Mark” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

2

2

Select “On” or “Off”.

■ Setting parental lock

1 Select “Parental Lock” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

Input the 4-digit personal code on the “Key Code” screen.

If you enter wrong numbers, select to delete the numbers.

3 Select a parental level (1-8) on the “Select Restriction Level” screen.

(

P. 456)

■ Setting the auto start

Discs that are inserted while the vehicle is in motion will automatically start playing.

1

2

Select “Auto Start Playback” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

Select “On” or “Off”.

Setting sound dynamic range

The difference between the lowest volume and the highest volume can be adjusted.

1

2

Select “Sound Dynamic Range” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

450

5-3. Using the audio system

■ Entering a language code

If you select “Other” on the “Audio Language” screen, “Subtitle Language” screen or “Menu Language” screen you can select a language by entering the 4-digit language code if that language is available.

Input the 4-digit language code and then select “OK”.

: Deletes the last input digit

: Returns to the previous screen

● Language codes

Code Language

0514 English

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821

1115

Russian

Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

Code Language

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214

Bengali,

Bangla

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

Code Language

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1001 Japanese

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Code

0113

0118

0119

Language

Amharic

Arabic

Assamese

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

Code Language

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0201

0205

Bashkir

Byelorussian

0701 Irish

0704

Scottish-

Gaelic

1119

1121

Kashmiri

Kurdish

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

Code

1114

1914

1915

Language

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101

1111

1112

1113

Georgian

Kazakh

Greenlandic

Cambodian

Kannada

Shona

Somali

1125

1201

1214

1215

1220

Kirghiz

Latin

Lingala

Laothian

Lithuanian

1513

1518

1601

1612

1619

(Afan)

Oromo

Oriya

Panjabi

Polish

Pashto,

Pushto

1917

1918

1919

Serbian

Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921

Albanian

Sundanese

1222

Latvian,

Lettish

1721 Quechua 1923 Swahili

1307

1309 Maori

1311

1312

Malagasy

Macedonian

Malayalam

1813

1814

1815

Rhaeto-

Romance

Kirundi

Romanian

2001

2005

2007

Tamil

Telugu

Tajik

1823 Kinyarwanda 2008 Thai

1314

1315

1318

1319

Mongolian

Moldavian

Marathi

Malay

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sango

1908

Serbo-

Croatian

2009

2011

2012

2014

Tigrinya

Turkmen

Tagalog

Setswana

451

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

452

5-3. Using the audio system

Code Language

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

2023 Twi

2111

2118

Ukrainian

Urdu

2126 Uzbek

Code Language

1909 Sinhalese

1911

1912

Slovak

Slovenian

1913 Samoan

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

Code Language

2015 Tongan

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

■ When a rear passenger selects set up menu

Follow the directions on the warning screen that is displayed.

Under the same condition, the rear passenger can cancel the set up operation from the front seat.

■ Error messages

If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check if the region code printed on the DVD matches the player’s region code.

If a different message is displayed:

P. 453

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

453

CD/DVD player and DVD video disc information

Error messages

Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

The error messages may differ from those shown below depending on the language selected.

Message

No disc found.

Check DISC

DISC Error

No music files found.

Cause

Correction

Procedures

There is no disc in the player.

• The disc is dirty or damaged.

• The disc is inserted upside down.

• The disc is not playable with the player.

Insert a disc.

• Clean the disc.

• Insert the disc correctly.

• Confirm the disc is playable with the player.

• There is a malfunction within the system.

• Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player.

This indicates that no playable data is included in the disc.

• Eject the disc.

• Eject the disc and allow the player to cool down.

Eject the disc.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

454

5-3. Using the audio system

DVD video discs

● The DVD player conforms to NTSC/PAL color TV formats. DVD video discs conforming to another format such as SECAM cannot be used.

● Region code: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating the region in which you can use the DVD video disc. If the DVD video disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc on this player, “Region Code Error” appears on the screen. Even if the DVD video disc does not have a region code, you may not be able to use it.

■ Symbols shown on DVD video discs

Symbol

NTSC/PAL

Meaning

Indicates NTSC/PAL format

Indicates the number of audio tracks

Indicates the number of language subtitles

Indicates the number of angles

Indicates the screen display ratios available

Wide screen: 16:9

Standard: 4:3

Indicates the disc’s region code

ALL: in all countries

Number: region code

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

455

■ Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

Use only discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your player:

● SACD

● dts CD

● Copy-protected CD

● DVD audio

● Video CD

● DVD-R

● DVD+R

● DVD-RW

● DVD+RW

● DVD-RAM

■ CD/DVD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected.

■ If discs are left inside the CD/DVD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

Discs may be damaged and may not play properly.

■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD/DVD player.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

456

5-3. Using the audio system

■ DVD video disc information

● DVD video discs

A DVD video disc is a Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is stored using

PCM and Dolby Digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multiangle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.

● Viewer restrictions

This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc.

Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.

Level 2-7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.

● Multi-angle option

You can enjoy the same scene from different angles.

● Multi-language option

You can select the subtitle and audio languages.

● Region codes

The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player. (

P. 454)

● Audio

This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format

DVDs. Other decoded types cannot be played.

● Title and chapter

Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs.

Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.

Chapter: A title is comprised of one or more chapters.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

457

■ Sound

Dolby Digital

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

■ MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8, 32, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

458

5-3. Using the audio system

● WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)

● Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

● Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used:

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

● File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

● Discs containing multi-session recordings

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

459

● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

● MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot be played.

● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

● Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and

WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

460

5-3. Using the audio system

■ The Gracenote ® media database

● Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.

®

Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related

.

● CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present

Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the

Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents.

Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.

■ Gracenote ® End User License Agreement

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain musicrelated information, including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote

Data”) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS

EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

461

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote

Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the

Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are.

For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the

Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS

IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-

CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-

INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT

WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR

ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE

FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY

LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

462

5-3. Using the audio system

CAUTION

■ DVD video precaution

Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or startled when you change to a different audio source.

Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

NOTICE

■ Discs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of discs, 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters or Dual Disc.

Doing so may damage the player and/or disc insert/eject function.

● Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.

(12 cm)

463

● Low-quality or deformed discs

5

● Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area

● Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

464

5-3. Using the audio system

NOTICE

■ Player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the player itself.

● Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.

● Do not apply oil to the player.

● Store discs away from direct sunlight.

● Never try to disassemble any part of the player.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Listening to Bluetooth

®

audio

465

The Bluetooth ® audio system enables users to enjoy music played on a portable player from the vehicle speaker via wireless communication.

This audio system supports Bluetooth ® , a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth ® , the Bluetooth ® audio system will not function.

Press the “MEDIA” button if a Bluetooth ® audio player has already been connected.

Select the “BT Audio” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the “BT Audio” tab is selected.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

466

5-3. Using the audio system

1

2

4

6

7

3

5

Folder/album selection

Track selection

Displays folder/album list

Displays track list

Connection status

Connecting Bluetooth ® audio player

Setting the sound (

P. 495)

8

9

Play/pause

Repeat play

10

11

Track selection/fast forward/ rewind

MEDIA button

Power

12

13

14

Volume

Random playback

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

467

Status display

1

2

You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on the screen.

Connection status

Battery charge

Indicators

Connection status

Battery charge

Good

Full

Conditions

No connection

Empty

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

468

5-3. Using the audio system

Connecting Bluetooth

®

audio player

To use the Bluetooth ® audio system, you need to enter your portable player into the system. Once registered, you can enjoy your music on the vehicle’s audio system. (

P. 566)

For the operation procedure for the portable player, consult your player’s accompanying instruction manual.

■ When “Bluetooth* Power” is turned on

When the portable player is on standby for the connection, it will be automatically connected whenever the power switch is in either

ACCESSORY or ON mode.

■ When “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off

Manually connect the portable player in accordance with the following procedure.

1 Select “Connect”.

2 Select the desired portable player.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3 When the connection is completed, this screen is displayed. It is now possible to use the portable player.

5-3. Using the audio system

469

Playing Bluetooth

®

audio

Select to play, select to pause or press to play/pause.

Some titles may not be displayed depending on the type of portable player.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

470

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting a track/folder/album

On the audio top screen

Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous folder/album.

■ On the playlist screen

1 Select the album name on the screen to display the playlist screen.

2

3

Select the desired screen button.

If the folder name on the screen is selected, the track list screen is displayed.

Select the desired track name on the screen.

,

: Select to move the list up or down by 5 track/folder groups.

“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or

“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to scroll through the track list one by one.

“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the track/folder list.

, : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name.

Select to move to the beginning of the name.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

471

Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a track

On the audio top screen

Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob or press “<” or “>” on the

“PRST•TRACK” button to select the desired track number.

■ On the track list screen

1 Select the track name on the screen to display the following track list screen.

2 Select the desired track number.

, : Select to move the list up or down by 5 track groups.

“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or

“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to scroll through the track list one by one.

“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the track list.

, : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name.

Select to move to the beginning of the name.

Fast forwarding and rewinding a track

Press and hold “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to fast forward or rewind.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

472

5-3. Using the audio system

Random playback

Playing the tracks on the album in random order

Select “RAND” on the screen.

Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows: album random  all track random  off

Playing tracks from all the albums in random order

Select “RAND” repeatedly until “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.

To cancel, select “RAND” again.

Repeat play

Repeating a track

Select “RPT” on the screen.

Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode changes as follows: track repeat  album repeat  off

Repeating an album

Select “RPT” repeatedly until “ALB.RPT” appears on the screen.

To cancel, select “RPT” again.

■ If you select

The display returns to the previous screen.

■ Connecting Bluetooth ® audio player

● Selecting “Connect Portable Player” on the “Bluetooth

Bluetooth ® audio player. (

P. 566)

*

” screen also connects a

● When none of the selectable portable players have been registered, a screen confirming registration is displayed. The registration method is the same as phone registration. (

P. 559)

● When the currently connected portable player is selected, a screen confirming the selected player’s disconnection is displayed. (

P. 559)

● If connection fails once, a changing connection method confirmation screen is displayed. If connection fails 2 or more times, a message will be displayed. When this message is displayed, try again.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

473

■ When using the Bluetooth ® audio system

● In the following conditions, the system may not function.

• The portable player is turned off

• The portable player is not connected

• The portable player battery is low

● There may be a delay if phone connection is carried out during Bluetooth ® play.

audio

● Depending on the type of portable player that is connected to the system, operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.

■ Bluetooth ® antenna

The antenna is built into the instrument panel. If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.

■ Battery charge/signal status

This display may not correspond exactly with the portable player, and this system does not have a charging function.

■ About Bluetooth ®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

474

5-3. Using the audio system

■ Compatible models

Portable players must correspond to the following specifications:

● Bluetooth ® specification

Ver. 1.1 or higher

(Recommended: Ver. 2.1+EDR or higher)

● Profile

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher

• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher

(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)

However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player. Also, the different screen is displayed depending on which portable player is connecting.

Please go to the website at http://www.lexus.com/ to find approved portable players for this system.

■ Certification

P. 512

■ Reconnecting the portable player

If the portable player is disconnected with a poor reception when the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the portable player.

If you have switched off the portable player yourself, follow the instructions below to reconnect:

● Select the portable player again

● Enter the portable player

■ When transferring ownership of your vehicle

Be sure to remove the registered portable player from the system. (

P. 561)

CAUTION

■ While driving

Do not use the portable player or connect the Bluetooth ® system.

NOTICE

■ When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the portable player.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Listening to a USB memory

475

Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

Press the “MEDIA” button if a USB memory has already been connected. Select the “USB” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the “USB” tab is selected.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

476

5-3. Using the audio system

1

2

4

6

3

5

Folder/album selection

Track/file selection

Displays folder/album list

Displays track/file list

Setting the sound (

P. 495)

Play/pause

7

8

9

10

11

Repeat play

Track and file selection/fast forward/rewind

MEDIA button

Power

Volume

12

Random playback

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1

Connecting the USB memory

Open the console box, open the cover and connect a USB memory.

Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on.

5-3. Using the audio system

477

2 Press the “MEDIA” button.

Playing a USB memory

Play/pause

Select

to play, select

Tag mode

to pause or press to play/pause.

Folder mode

5

Selecting a folder/album

Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous folder/ album.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

478

5-3. Using the audio system

1

Selecting a folder, artist or album

Select the folder/album name on the screen.

2 Select the desired tab and select the desired folder, artist or album.

Character screen buttons, “ABC”,

“DEF” etc., allow a direct jump to list entries that begin with the same letter as the character button.

Each time the same character screen button is selected, the list starting with the subsequent character is displayed.

, : Select to move the list up or down by 5 folder/artist/album groups.

“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the folder/ artist/album list.

, : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name. Select to move to the beginning of the name.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

479

Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a file/track

Selecting one file/track at a time

Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous file/track.

Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob or press “<” or “>” on the

“PRST•TRACK” button to select the desired file/track.

Selecting a file/track from the list

1 Select the file/track name on the screen to display the following file/ track list screen.

2 Select the desired file/track number.

,

: Select to move the list up or down by 5 file/track groups.

“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or

“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to scroll through the file/track list one by one.

“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the file/track list.

, : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name.

Select to move to the beginning of the name.

■ Fast forwarding or rewinding a file/track

To fast forward or rewind, press and hold “<” or “>” on the

“PRST•TRACK” button.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

480

5-3. Using the audio system

Random playback

Playing files/tracks from a particular folder in random order

Select “RAND” on the screen.

Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows: random (1 folder/album random)  folder/album random (all folders/ albums random)  off

■ Playing the all folders/albums from a USB memory in random order

Select “RAND” repeatedly until “FLD.RAND”/“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.

To cancel, select “RAND” again.

Repeat play

■ Repeating a file/track

Select “RPT” on the screen.

Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode changes as follows:

● When “RAND” is off file/track repeat  folder/album repeat  off

● When “RAND” is on file/track repeat  off

■ Repeating a folder/album

Select “RPT” repeatedly until “FLD.RPT”/“ALB.RPT” appears on the screen.

To cancel, select “RPT” again.

Available except when random playback is selected

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

481

■ If you select

The display returns to the previous screen.

■ USB memory functions

● When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume playing from the same point it was last used.

● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve some malfunctions.

■ When using a USB memory

You may be unable to use the instrument panel power outlet if the USB memory is connected to the USB port at the same time.

■ Error messages for USB memory

“USB Error”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.

“No music files found.”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the

USB memory.

■ USB memory

● Compatible devices

USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.

● Compatible device formats

The following device formats can be used:

• USB communication formats: USB2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)

• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)

• Correspondence class: Mass storage class

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999

• Maximum number of files per folder: 255

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

482

5-3. Using the audio system

● MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2.5)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

● WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)

● File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags.

(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

483

● MP3 and WMA playback

• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or

WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been changed), the USB device will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).

● Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and

WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

484

5-3. Using the audio system

CAUTION

■ While driving

Do not connect an USB memory or operate the controls.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the USB memory or its terminal

● Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside of the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the USB memory.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it is connected.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

485

Listening to an iPod

Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

Press the “MEDIA” button if an iPod has already been connected.

Select the “iPod” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the

“iPod” tab is selected.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

486

5-3. Using the audio system

1

2

4

6

3

5

Track selection

Displays track list

Selecting a play mode

Setting the sound (

P. 495)

Play/pause

Repeat play

7

8

9

10

11

Track selection/fast forward/ rewind

MEDIA button

Power

Volume

Random playback

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Connecting an iPod

1 Open the console box, open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.

Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.

5-3. Using the audio system

487

2 Press the “MEDIA” button.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

488

5-3. Using the audio system

Cover art display settings

When the track currently being played has cover art data, it can be displayed.

1

2

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.

3 Select “iPod Settings”.

4 Select “Display Cover Art”

5 Select “On” or “Off”.

6 After iPod setting has been changed, select “OK”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Playing iPod

Play/pause

Select to play, select to pause or press to play/ pause.

5-3. Using the audio system

489

Selecting a play mode

1 Select “Browse”.

5

2 Select the desired play mode.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

490

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a track

Selecting one track at a time

Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous track.

Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob or press “<” or “>” on the

“PRST•TRACK” button to select the desired track.

Selecting a track from the list

1 Select the track name on the screen to display the following track list screen.

2 Select the desired track number.

,

: Select to move the list up or down by 5 track groups.

“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or

“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to scroll through the track list one by one.

“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down the track list.

, : If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long for the screen. Select to scroll to the end of the name.

Select to move to the beginning of the name.

■ Fast forwarding or rewinding a track

To fast forward or rewind, press and hold “<” or “>” on the

“PRST•TRACK” button.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Random playback

Playing tracks in random order

Select “RAND” on the screen.

Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows: track shuffle  album shuffle  off

Playing the albums in random order

Select “RAND” repeatedly until “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.

To cancel, select “RAND” again.

491

Repeat play

Select “RPT” on the screen.

“RPT” appears on the screen.

To cancel, select “RPT” again.

■ If you select

The display returns to the previous screen.

■ About iPod

5

● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.

● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

492

5-3. Using the audio system

■ iPod cover art

● Depending on the iPod and the songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.

This function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (

P. 488)

● It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process.

● Only iPod cover art that is saved in JPEG format can be displayed.

■ iPod functions

● When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the system can only output the sound by selecting “Video” on the “iPod” screen.

● Depending on the iPod, the video sound may not be able to be heard.

● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.

■ When using an iPod

You maybe unable to use the instrument panel power outlet if the iPod is connected to the USB port at the same time.

■ Battery charge

When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its battery.

■ Error messages for iPod

“iPod Error”:

This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.

“No music files found.”:

This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

“Please check the iPod firmware version.”:

This indicates that the software version is not compatible. Perform the iPod firmware updates and try again.

“iPod authorization failed.”:

This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod. Please check your iPod.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

493

■ Compatible models

The following iPod

®

, iPod nano

®

, iPod classic can be used with this system.

®

, iPod touch

®

and iPhone

®

devices

■ Made for

• iPod touch (4th generation)

• iPod touch (3rd generation)

• iPod touch (2nd generation)

• iPod touch (1st generation)

• iPod classic

• iPod with video

• iPod nano (6th generation)

• iPod nano (5th generation)

• iPod nano (4th generation)

• iPod nano (3rd generation)

• iPod nano (2nd generation)

• iPod nano (1st generation)

• iPhone 4

• iPhone 3GS

• iPhone 3G

• iPhone

Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

494

5-3. Using the audio system

CAUTION

■ While driving

Do not connect an iPod or operate the controls.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminal

● Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Optimal use of the audio/video system

Select settings.

to adjust the sound

495

■ “Sound” tab

1 2 3 Select “-” or “+” to adjust the treble, mid or bass.

4 5

6 7

Select “Front” or “Rear” to adjust the front/rear audio balance.

Select “L” or “R” to adjust the left/right audio balance.

2

1

■ “DSP” tab

Automatic Sound Levelizer

(ASL) on/off

Surround on/off

After sound setting has been changed, select “OK”.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

496

5-3. Using the audio system

■ The sound quality level is adjusted individually

The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for the each audio mode separately.

■ About Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle speed, wind noise or other noise.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

497

Using the AUX port

This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers.

1 Open the console box, open the cover and connect the portable audio device.

2 Press the “MEDIA” button.

5

3 Select the “AUX” tab on the screen or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly to change to AUX mode.

■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

498

5-3. Using the audio system

Using the rear seat audio controls

Some front audio features can be controlled from the rear seats.

1

2

3

Display

Power on/off

Selecting an audio source

4

6

5

Volume up/down

Selecting a track or file etc.

Selecting a preset station or folder etc.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Turning the power on/off

Press to turn the front audio system on.

Pressing the button again turns the system off.

499

Changing the audio source

Press to change the audio source. The audio source as follows each time the button is pressed. If no discs are inserted in the player, or if the external device is not connected, that mode will be skipped.

FM SAT Apps DVD player iPod or USB memory 

Bluetooth

®

audio player AUX AM

Adjusting the volume

Press “ ” on to increase the volume and “ ” to decrease the volume.

Press and hold the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

500

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting a radio station

Select a radio station

1 Press to select a frequency band.

2 Press “ ” or “” on to seek the frequency.

1

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold

■ Select a preset station

Press to select a frequency band.

until you hear a beep.

2 Press “ ” or “” on to select a preset station.

Selecting a track

Audio CD

1 Press to select the DVD player.

2 Press “ ” or “” on to select a track.

■ Bluetooth

®

audio player

1 Press to select the Bluetooth ® audio player.

2 Press “ ” or “” on to select an folder.

3 Press “ ” or “” on

■ iPod

1 Press

to select a file.

to select the iPod.

2 Press “ ” or “” on to select a file.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting a chapter (DVD video mode)

1 Press to select the DVD player.

2 Press “ ” or “” on to select a chapter.

Selecting a file

■ MP3 disc or WMA disc

1 Press to select the DVD player.

2 Press “ ” or “” on to select a folder.

3 Press “ ” or “” on to select a file.

■ USB memory

1 Press to select the USB memory.

2 Press “ ” or “” on to select a folder.

3 Press “ ” or “” on to select a file.

501

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

502

5-3. Using the audio system

■ Fast forwarding or rewinding a chapter or file

Press and hold “ ” or “” on .

■ Button lock function

To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.

(

P. 383)

■ Rear control panel illumination off function

Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. (

P. 383)

■ When “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display

Refer to the following and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the disc or inside the player. The disc may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.

“WAIT”: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Eject the disc and allow the player to cool down.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that an MP3/WMA file is not included in the disc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Using the steering wheel audio switches

503

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

1

2

3

Radio mode: Selects a radio station

Audio CD mode:

Selects a track

MP3/WMA disc mode:

Selects a file and folder

DVD mode: Selects a chapter

Bluetooth

®

audio mode:

Selects a track and album iPod mode: Selects a track

USB memory mode:

Selects a file and folder

Volume

Turns the power on, selects audio source

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

504

5-3. Using the audio system

Turning on the power

Press when the audio system is turned off.

Changing the audio source

Press the to select an audio mode.

Each press changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to use.

Adjusting the volume

Press to increase the volume and to decrease the volume.

Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Silencing a sound or pause the current operation

Press and hold .

To cancel, press and hold again.

Selecting the preset station/channel (radio)

1 Press

2 Press

to select the radio mode.

or to select.

Seeking a radio station/channel

1 Press to select the radio mode.

2 Press and hold the or

To cancel, press either switch.

switch until you hear a beep.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

505

Selecting a track/file or chapter

1 Press to select the audio CD, MP3/WMA disc, DVD, Bluetooth ® audio, iPod, or USB memory mode.

2 Press or to select.

To return to the beginning of the current track, file or chapter, press the switch once quickly.

Selecting an album

1 Press to select Bluetooth ® audio or USB memory mode.

2 Press and hold or until a beep is heard to select.

Selecting a folder

1 Press to select the MP3/WMA disc or USB memory mode.

2 Press and hold or until a beep is heard to select.

5

CAUTION

■ To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

506

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Hands-free system (for cellular phone)

The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular phone without touching it.

This system supports Bluetooth ® cellular phones. Bluetooth ® is a wireless data system that allows a cellular phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and outgoing/incoming calls.

The illustrations of the hands-free system screens shown here may slightly vary depending on the type of the system.

Vehicles with a navigation system: The hands-free system function can be displayed and operated on the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

1

2

Telephone switch

Off hook switch

• Sending

• Receiving

• “Phone” screen display

On hook switch

• End call

• Refuse call

Microphone

You can use the microphone when talking on the phone.

The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.

507

5

To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth ® phone in the system. (

P. 515)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

508

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

1

Steering switch

Adjusting the volume

Press to increase the vol-

2 ume and volume.

to decrease the

Hold the switch in that position to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Back switch

Press .

To return to the previous screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

509

Status display

4

1

2

3

You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on the “Phone” screen.

Connection status

Battery charge

Call area

Signal strength

Indicators

Connection status

Battery charge

Call area

Signal strength

Good

Full

“Rm”: Roaming area

Excellent

Conditions

No connection

Empty

5

Poor

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

510

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ When using the hands-free system

● The audio system is muted when making a call.

● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.

● If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

● Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.

● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:

• When driving on unpaved roads

• When driving at high speeds

• If a window is open

• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone

• If the air conditioning is set to high

• There is an effect from the network of the cellular phone

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate

● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth ®

● If the cellular phone is turned off

● If you are outside service range

● If the cellular phone is not connected

● If the cellular phone’s battery is low

● When the cellular phone is not connected, “No connect” is displayed.

■ Bluetooth ® antenna

The antenna is built into the instrument panel. If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.

■ Battery charge/Signal status

● This display may not correspond exactly with the cellular phone itself.

● When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place inaccessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.

■ When using Bluetooth ® audio and hands-free system at the same time

The following problems may occur.

● The Bluetooth ® connection may be cut.

● Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth ® audio playback.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

511

■ About the phonebook in this system

The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.

● Phonebook data

● Call history date

● Speed dial date

● Image data

● Messages

● Quick reply messages

● All phone settings

When you delete the phone, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.

■ When you release your car

Be sure to initialize your data. (

P. 347)

■ About Bluetooth ®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

512

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Compatible models

This system supports the following service.

● Bluetooth ® higher)

Specification Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1+EDR or

● Profiles

• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5 or higher)

• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher

• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher

• MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher

• SPP (Serial Port Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher

*

*

: This profile is necessary when using Apps. For details, refer to the “Navigation

System Owner’s Manual”

If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth ® phone, and take OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP service individually.

If the connected Bluetooth ® phone version is older than recommended or incompatible, this function may not be used.

Please go to http://www.lexus.com/ to find approved Bluetooth ® system.

phones for this

■ Certification

FCC ID: AJDK041

IC: 775E-K041

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

For vehicles sold in Canada:

This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.

Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

513

CAUTION

■ FCC WARNING

This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure

Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency

(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least

7.9 in. (20 cm) or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à

OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.

Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans

évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit

être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités: mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

514

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

CAUTION

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Tout changement ou toute modification de la construction non approuvé expressément par l’abonné responsable de la conformité risque d’annuler l’autorité de l’utilisateur d’exploiter l’équipement.

Cet émetteur ne doit pas être co-implanté ou actionné en même temps qu’aucune autre antenne ou émetteur.

Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by

Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.

Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.

■ Caution while driving

Do not use the cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth ® system.

NOTICE

■ When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave your cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the phone.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Using a Bluetooth

®

phone

1

2

4

3

Device name

Bluetooth ® connection status

Character deletion

Make a call

515

To display the screen shown above, press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Phone” or press on the steering wheel.

Registering a Bluetooth

®

phone

You can register up to 5 phones in the system.

1 Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2 Select “Yes”.

If 5 Bluetooth ® devices have already been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted.

(

P. 519)

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

516

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

3 Input the passcode displayed on the screen into your phone.

For the operation of the phone, see the manual that comes with your cellular phone.

Depending on the type of

Bluetooth ® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.

A passcode is not required for SSP

(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth ® phones. Depending on the type of Bluetooth ® phone being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth ® phone’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth ® phone according to the confirmation message.

If you want to cancel it, select “Cancel”.

If a completion message is displayed, registration is complete.

If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Bluetooth

®

phone connection

There are two connection methods available — automatic and manual.

■ Automatic

When you register your phone, auto connection will be activated.

Always set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth ® phone on the place where connection can be established.

When the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system will search for a nearby cellular phone you have registered. The system will connect with the phone that was last connected, if it is nearby.

When “Display Phone Status” is set to “On”, the connection status is displayed. (

P. 569)

Depending on the type of Bluetooth

® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.

517

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

518

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Manual

1

When the auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, you must connect Bluetooth ® manually.

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2 Select “Connect Phone”.

3

4

Select the screen button corresponding to the desired phone connection.

When the cellular phone’s device name has not been able to be obtained, “Device 1” to “Device 5” will be displayed in the order the phones were registered.

This screen is displayed.

If a completion message is displayed, connection is complete.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

519

■ Reconnecting to the Bluetooth ® phone

If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the power switch in

ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.

If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, it must be connected manually, or the phone must be re-selected or re-entered.

■ Connecting the phone while Bluetooth ® audio is playing

● Bluetooth ® audio will stop temporarily.

● It may take time to connect.

■ Connecting the phone while another Bluetooth ® device is connected

When another Bluetooth ® device is currently connected, a confirmation message will be displayed. To disconnect the Bluetooth ® device, select “Yes”.

■ Connecting the phone while 5 Bluetooth ® devices have already been registered

When 5 Bluetooth ® devices have already been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted. Select “Yes” to delete one or more.

Select the device to be deleted, then select “Remove”, and “Yes”.

■ If the Bluetooth ® phone has a Bluetooth ® audio function

When the Bluetooth ® phone to be registered has a Bluetooth ® audio function, this audio function will be registered automatically at the same time and confirmation message may be displayed. If this screen is displayed, select “Yes” to connect the audio function or select “No” to cancel the connection.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

520

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Making a call

Once the Bluetooth ® phone is registered, you can make a call using the following procedure:

■ Dialing

1 Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2 Input the phone number.

To delete the inputted phone number, select .

3 Select or press on the steering wheel.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth ® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.

Dialing from the phonebook

1

You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your cellular phone. The system has one phonebook for each phone. Up to

1000 entries may be stored in each phonebook. (

P. 537)

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Choose the desired data to call from the list.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

4 Choose the number and then select or press the steering wheel.

on

521

■ When the phonebook is empty

1

If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the phonebook cannot be transferred.

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

PBAP compatible models

Select “Yes”.

5

PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible models

3 Select “Transfer”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

522

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

4

5

Transfer the phonebook data to the system using the Bluetooth ® phone.

This screen appears while transferring. To cancel this function, select

“Cancel”.

Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring phonebook data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth ® phone.

When the data transfer from a

PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible model is complete,

“Done” will appear on the screen. Select “Done”.

Calling using speed dial

1

You can make a call using numbers registered from the phonebook.

(

P. 537)

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.

Select the desired tab and choose the desired number to make a call.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

523

■ Dialing from history

You can call using the call history which has the 4 functions below.

“All”: All the numbers below which were memorized

“Missed”: Calls which you missed

“Incoming”: Calls which you received

“Outgoing”: Numbers which you called

1

2

You can call using the 25 most recently called numbers shown by “All” tab while driving.

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.

3 Select the desired tab and choose the desired data from the list.

5

4 Select or press the steering wheel.

on

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

524

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Calling using voice recognition

You can call by giving a voice command. (

 P. 353)

Press .

The “Call <name> <type>” and “Dial <number>” operating procedures are explained here. Other operating procedures are also similar.

● Calling by name

You can call by giving a name registered in the phonebook.

(

P. 537)

1

2

Press .

Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then after saying “Call” say the desired name, or the name and type of phone.

3 Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say “Dial”.

(You can also call by pressing on the steering wheel.)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

● Calling by dial number

You can call by giving a phone number

1 Press .

2 Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then after saying “Dial” say the phone number.

525

3 Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say “Dial”.

(You can also call by pressing on the steering wheel.)

■ Calling using SMS/MMS message

1

You can call using the SMS (Short Message Service)/MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) message sender’s phone number.

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2 Select “Messages”.

When “Message Transfer” is set to

“Off”, a confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”.

5

3 Select the “SMS/MMS” tab and then select the desired received message from the list.

4

The tab display may vary depending on the type of cellular phone.

Select or press on the steering wheel.

Calling using POI (vehicles with the navigation system)

You can make a call using a Point Of Interest.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

526

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Call history list

● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phone book, the name is displayed in the call history.

● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in the call history.

● Number-withheld calls are also memorized in the system.

■ When driving

The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phonebook”, and “Dialing from history”

(except for call using the 25 most recently called numbers shown by “All” tab) are unavailable.

■ When calling by registered name in the phonebook

● When “Call <name> <type>” on the “Shortcut Menu” screen is dimmed, the phonebook’s voice command recognition cannot be used. Check the Bluetooth nection and if the contacts have been transferred to the system.

® con-

● Short or abbreviated names in the phonebook may not be recognized. Change names in the phonebook to full names.

● Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be displayed. After confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”.

● When the system recognizes multiple names from the phonebook, a name candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired name is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the name from the candidate list (number 1 and number 2) to select a name from the candidate list.

● When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the phonebook, a candidate list will be displayed. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list

(number 1 and number 2) to select a phone number from the candidate list.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

527

■ When calling by phone number

● Say the phone number one digit at a time. For example, if the phone number is

2345678, say “two three four five six seven eight”.

● The system can recognize the following types of phone numbers:

• 3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)

• 7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers)

• 10 digit numbers (Area code + Local phone number)

• 11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code + Local phone number)

● As the system cannot recognize additional numbers, say the complete number without stopping.

● When the system recognizes multiple phone numbers, a phone number candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list (number 1 and number 2) to select a phone number from the candidate list

■ International calls

To dial a phone number that is not a 3, 7, 10 or 11 digit number, for example an international number, use “International Call”.

1 Press on the steering wheel to display the “Shortcut Menu” screen and saying “Main menu” or select “Main Menu”.

2 Say “Use a phone”.

3 Say “International call”.

Up to 24 digits can be recognized when using the international call function. The number can also be divided into multiple groups and recognized.

You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the cellular phone in use.

■ Calling by using the latest call history item

1 Press on the steering wheel to display the “Phone” screen.

2 Press

3 Press

4 Select

on the steering wheel to display the “Call History” screen.

on the steering wheel to select the most recent number in the history.

or press on the steering wheel.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

528

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ To cancel voice recognition

● Press and hold .

● Press on the steering wheel.

● Select “Cancel”.

■ When using voice recognition

Use correct commands and speak clearly, otherwise the system may not correctly recognize the command. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to recognize the desired command.

Receiving a call

When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a sound.

Select or press steering wheel.

on the

■ To refuse a call

Select or press on the steering wheel.

To adjust the incoming call volume

Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel.

■ International calls

Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone in use.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Speaking on the phone

The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.

529

To adjust the incoming call volume

Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel.

To prevent the other party from hearing your voice

Select “Mute”.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

530

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Inputting tones

When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank, you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phonebook.

1 Select “0-9” on the “Call” screen.

2 Input the number.

If repeated tone symbols

*

are stored in the phonebook, “Send” and “Clear” are displayed on the right side of the screen.

*

: Repeated tone symbols are symbols or numbers displayed as p or w, that come after the phone number.

(e.g. 056133w0123p#1 ✽)

3 Confirm the number displayed on the screen, and select “Send”.

If you select “Clear”, this function will end.

To transfer a call

Select “Handset Mode” to change from hands-free call to cellular phone call. Select “Handsfree Mode” to change from cellular phone call to hands-free call.

To hang up

Select or press on the steering wheel.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

531

■ Call waiting

When a connected call is interrupted by the third party, the incoming call message will be displayed.

● To talk with the other party: Select ing wheel.

● To refuse the call: Select or press

or press on the steer-

on the steering wheel.

Everytime you select or press on the steering wheel after a call is interrupted, you will be switched to the other party.

If your cellular phone is not accepted in HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used.

■ Transferring calls

● It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to a cellular phone while driving.

● If you transfer from a cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.

● Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone used.

● For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone’s manual.

■ Repeated tone symbols

When the “p” pause tone is used, after waiting 2 seconds the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent. When the “w” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after user operation.

■ While driving

Key input is unavailable.

■ Voice recognition during a call

“Send Tones” can be operated by voice recognition. (

P. 353)

■ Interrupt call operation

Interrupt call operation may differ from depending on your phone company and the cellular phone.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

532

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Using a Bluetooth

®

phone message

Received messages can be forwarded from the connected Bluetooth ® phone, enabling checking and replying (Quick reply).

■ Checking a message

1 Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2 Select “Messages” on the “Phone” screen.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth ® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.

3

When “Message Transfer” is set to “Off”, a confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”.

Select the desired message to check.

The text of the message is not displayed while driving.

Selecting “Previous” or “Next” displays the previous or next message.

4 Select “Play” to start reading out of the message. Select “Stop” to stop the function.

■ To adjust the message reading out volume

Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel.

■ Replying a message (Quick reply)

1 Select “Reply” on the desired message screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

2 Select the desired message.

Select “Send”.

While the message is being sent, a sending message screen is displayed.

533

■ To check the message

● Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth ® phone’s registered mail address folder. Select the tab of the desired folder to be displayed.

● Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth ® phone can be displayed.

● When the received message is an e-mail and “Update Message Read Status on

Phone” is set to “On”, “Mark as Unread” or “Mark as Read” can be selected. Select

“Mark as Unread” to mark mails that have been read on the Bluetooth on the Bluetooth ® phone as read. (

P. 551)

® phone as unread. Conversely, select “Mark as Read” to mark mails that have not been read

■ Calling using SMS/MMS message

You can call using the SMS (Short Message Service)/MMS (Multimedia Messaging

Service) message sender’s phone number. (

P. 525)

■ If the message delivery failed

If message delivery has failed, a notification will be displayed on the screen.

Select “Retry” to attempt to send the message again or select “Cancel” to cancel.

■ Editing a quick reply message

You can edit the “Quick Reply Messages”. (

P. 553)

■ New message notification

If “New Message Pop-up” and “New Message Voice Notification” are set to “On”, a notification appears on the screen and a voice notification will be heard when a new message arrives, select “Read” to check the message, also to check the message later, select “Ignore”. When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to “On”, the message will be automatically read out. (

P. 551)

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

534

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Setting the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

You can set the hands-free system to your desired settings.

1

2

4

3

Phone sound settings

Phonebook settings

Message settings

Phone display settings

To display the screen shown above, press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”, and select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Phone sound settings

Setting the volume

1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (

P. 534)

2

3

Select “Phone Sound Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.

Choose the volume setting switch.

“Call Volume”: changes the speaker volume

“Ring Tone Volume”: changes the ring tone volume

535

4 Select “-” or “+” to lower or raise the volume, and then select “OK”.

5

5 When you complete all settings, select “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

536

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Setting the ring tone

1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (

P. 534)

2 Select “Phone Sound Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.

3

4

Select “Ring Tone” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen.

Select the screen button corresponding to the desired ring tone.

Ring tones can be heard by selecting the screen buttons, and then

“OK”.

5 When you complete setting, select “Save”.

■ Adaptive volume control

When traveling at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the system automatically raises the volume.

■ To return to the default phone sound settings

Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

537

Phonebook settings

1

2

The phonebook manages a maximum of 5 phonebooks in total. The data for 1000 contacts (up to 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in each phonebook.

Setting the phonebook

Setting the speed dials

3 Deleting the call history

To display the screen above, follow the steps below.

1

2

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”, and select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen.

■ Setting the phonebook

● Transferring a phone number

You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth ® phone to the system. Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and

PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth ® phones. If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the phonebook cannot be transferred.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

538

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth ® phones

1

2

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (

P. 537)

Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

3 Select “Transfer Contacts”.

4 Select “Update Contacts”.

5 Transfer the phonebook data to the system using the

Bluetooth ® phone.

This operation may be unnecessary depending on the cellular phone model.

Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring phonebook data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth ® phone.

If you wish to cancel the transfer before it finishes, select “Cancel”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

PBAP compatible models automatic data transfer setting

1

2

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (

P. 537)

Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

3

4

Select “Transfer Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.

Select the item to be set.

“Automatically Download Contacts”: Transfer the phonebook from a connected cellular phone.

“Automatically Download Call History”: transfer the call history from a connected cellular phone.

539

5 Select “On”, and then “Save”.

5

For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth ® phones

1 Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (

P. 537)

2

3

Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

Select “Transfer Contacts”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

540

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

4 Select “Replace Contacts” or

“Add Contacts”.

In the case that the phonebook contains phonebook data, this screen is displayed.

5

6

Transfer the phonebook data to the system using the

Bluetooth ® phone.

Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring phonebook data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth ® phone.

If you wish to cancel the transfer before it finishes, select “Cancel”.

If “Add Contacts” is selected and there is an interruption during the transfer of data, the phonebook data transferred until then will be stored in the system. Please note, this is not the case when “Cancel” is selected.

When the transfer is complete, “Done” will appear on the screen.

Select “Done”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

541

● Registering the phonebook data

You can register the phonebook data. Up to 3 numbers per person can be registered. New phonebook data cannot be added for PBAP compatible Bluetooth ® phones.

1

2

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (

P. 537)

Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

3 Select “New Contact” on the “Contacts” screen.

4 Input the name, and select

“OK”.

5 Input the phone number, and select “OK”.

If you want to use the tone signal after the phone number, input the tone signal too.

6 Select the desired phone type.

5

7 When two or less numbers in total are registered to this contact, this screen is displayed. When you want to add a number to this contact, select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

542

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

● Editing the phonebook data

You can register the phone number separately. Phonebooks cannot be edited for PBAP compatible Bluetooth ® phones.

1 Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (

P. 537)

2

3

Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

Select “Edit Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.

4 Choose the data to edit.

5 Select the desired name or number.

6 Edit the name or number. After editing, select “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

● Deleting the phonebook data

1 Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (

P. 537)

2 Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

3

4

Select “Delete Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.

Choose the data to delete.

You can select multiple data and delete them at the same time.

To delete all data, select “Select All”.

543

5 Select “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

544

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Phonebook data

Phonebook data is managed for every registered phone. When another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.

When selling or disposing of the vehicle, delete all your data on the system.

For PBAP compatible phones, delete the phonebook data after setting “Automatically Download Contacts” to “Off”. (

P. 539)

■ Setting the phonebook in a different way (To display the “Contacts” screen)

1 Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.

4 Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.

■ When another Bluetooth ® device is connected during transferring a phonebook

● For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

If another Bluetooth ®

® phones

device is connected when transferring phonebook data, depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth connected.

® device may need to be dis-

● For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth ®

When another Bluetooth ® displayed. If you want to disconnect it, select “Yes”.

phones

device is connected, a confirmation message will be

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

545

■ Transferring the phone number data in a different way

1 Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “Transfer” on the “Contacts” screen.

4 The “Transfer Contacts” screen is displayed. The following operations are performed in the same manner as when they are performed from the “Setup” screen.

■ Editing the phonebook data in a different way

1

● From “Contact” screen

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

2

3

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Choose the desired data from the list.

4

5

6

Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.

Select “Edit” on the “Contact” screen.

Follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data” from step . (

P. 542)

1

● From “Call History” screen

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.

Choose the desired data from the list.

4 Select “Add to Contacts” or “Update Contact” on the “Call History” screen.

5

1

If you select “Add to Contacts”, follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data” from step .

If you select “Update Contact”, follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data” from step . (

P. 542)

■ Deleting the phonebook data in a different way (PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible models)

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

4

5

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Choose the desired data from the list.

Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.

Select “Delete” on the “Contact” screen.

6 A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.

■ When a Bluetooth ® phone is deleted.

The phonebook data will be deleted at the same time.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

546

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Setting the speed dials

Registering the speed dial

You can register the desired phone number from the phonebook. Up to

18 numbers per phone can be registered.

1

2

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (

P. 537)

Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

3 Select “New”.

4 Choose the data to register.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

5 Select the desired phone number.

547

6 Select the switch you want to register the number in.

7 If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation message will be displayed. If you want to replace it, select “Yes”.

■ Deleting the speed dial

1 Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (

P. 537)

2

3

4

Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

Select “Delete” on the “Speed Dials” screen.

Choose the data to delete.

You can select multiple data and delete them at the same time.

To delete all data, select “Select

All”.

5

5 Select “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

548

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Setting the speed dials in a different way

1

● To display the “Speed Dials” screen

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “Options” on the “Speed Dial” screen.

1

● To display the “Contacts” screen

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.

4 Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Contacts” screen.

■ Registering the speed dial in a different way

1

● From “Speed Dial” screen

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

4

5

Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “(add new)” on the “Speed Dial” screen.

Select “Yes” to set new speed dial.

Choose the desired data from the list.

6

7

Select the desired phone number.

Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial” from step . (

P. 546)

1

● From “Contact” screen

Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

4

5

6

7

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Choose the desired data from the list.

Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.

Select “Set Speed Dial” on the “Contact” screen.

Select the desired phone number.

Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial” from step . (

P. 546)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

549

Deleting call history

The call history can be deleted. For PBAP compatible phones, delete the call history after setting “Automatically Download Call History” to “Off”.

(

P. 539)

1 Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (

P. 537)

2 Select “Delete Call History” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

3 Choose the desired history to delete.

4 Choose the data to delete.

You can select multiple data and delete them at the same time.

To delete all data, select “Select

All”.

5 Select “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

550

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Deleting call history in a different way

1 Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2 Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.

3

4

Select “Delete” on the “Call History” screen.

Follow the steps “Deleting call history” from step . (

P. 549)

■ Deleting after call history has been displayed

1 Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

4

Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.

Select the desired history to delete.

Select “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Message settings

You can change the message settings.

Page 1

Page 2

551

6

2

3

4

1

5

Message forwarding from cellular phone on/off

New message notification display on/off

New message voice notification on/off

Changing new message notification volume

Changing new message voice notification tone

Automatic message read out function on/off

7

8

9

Changing a message read out volume

Cellular phone’s message read and unread status update function on/ off

Editing “Edit Quick Reply Messages”

To display the screen above, follow the steps below.

1

2

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”, and select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

Select “Messaging Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

552

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Changing the new message notification volume

1 Display the “Messaging Settings” screen. (

P. 551)

2 Select “New Message Notification Volume” on the “Messaging Settings” screen.

3 Select “-” or “+” to lower or raise the volume, and then

“OK”.

4 When you complete setting, select “Save”.

■ Changing the new message notification tone

1 Display the “Messaging Settings” screen. (

P. 551)

2

3

Select “New Message Notification Tone” on the “Messaging Settings” screen.

Select the desired new message notification tone.

New message notification tones can be heard by selecting the screen buttons, and then “OK”.

4 When you complete setting, select “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

553

■ Changing the message read out volume

1 Display the “Messaging Settings” screen. (

P. 551)

2 Select “Message Readout Volume” on the “Messaging Settings” screen.

3 Select “-” or “+” to lower or raise the volume, and then

“OK”.

4

2

When you complete setting, select “Save”.

■ Editing the quick reply messages

1

Quick reply messages can be edited. 15 messages have already been stored.

Display the “Messaging Settings” screen. (

P. 551)

Select “Edit Quick Reply Messages” on the “Messaging Settings” screen.

3 Select the screen button corresponding to the desired message.

5

4 Edit the message. After editing, select “OK” and then “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

554

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ To display the “Message settings” screen in a different way

1 Display the “Phone” screen. (

P. 515)

2

3

Select “Messages” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “Options” on the “Messages” screen.

■ Editing the quick reply messages in a different way

1 Display the desired message on “Message” screen. (

P. 532)

2

3

4

5

Select “Reply” on the desired message screen.

Select “Edit” on the “Quick Reply Messages”.

Select the screen button corresponding to the desired message.

When you complete editing, select “OK” and then

Message” screen.

on the “Edit Quick Reply

■ Adaptive volume control

When traveling at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the system automatically raises the volume.

■ To return to the default message settings

Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

555

Phone display settings

Depending on the phone, this function may not be available even if the phone is PBAP compatible.

Vehicles without a navigation system

Vehicles with a navigation system

2

1 Changing the incoming call display mode

Changing the display phonebook transfer status on/off

*

3

4

Changing the display call history transfer status on/off

*

Changing the contact image during incoming call on/off

*

15 Changing the rotate contact image

*

*

: For PBAP compatible models

To display the screen above, follow the steps below.

1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”, and select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

2 Select “Phone Display Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

556

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Changing the incoming call display mode

You can select the method of the incoming call display.

1 Display the “Phone Display Settings” screen. (

P. 555)

2 Select “Incoming Call Display Mode” on the “Phone Display Settings” screen.

Vehicles without a navigation system

3 Select “Full Screen” or “Drop

Down”, and select “Save”.

“Full Screen”: The hands-free screen is displayed when a call is received, and you can operate the system from that screen.

“Drop Down”: A message is displayed at the top of the screen, and you can only operate the system with the steering switches.

3

Vehicles with a navigation system

Select “Main Screen” or “Side

Screen”, and select “Save”.

“Main Screen”: The hands-free screen is displayed when a call is received, and you can operate the system from that screen.

“Side Screen”: A message is displayed at the side screen, and you can only operate the system with the steering switches.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

557

■ Changing the rotating contact images

For PBAP compatible models, when “Contact Image for Incoming

Calls” is set to “On”, images stored together with phone numbers in the cellular phone’s phonebook will be transferred and displayed during the incoming call. The orientation of the image can be set.

1

2

Display the “Phone Display Settings” screen. (

P. 555)

Select “Rotate Contact Images” on the “Phone Display Settings” screen.

3 Choose the desired orientation of the image to be displayed, and then “Save”.

■ To return to the default detailed phone settings

Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

558

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Setting the Bluetooth

®

You can confirm and change the Bluetooth ® settings.

1

2

4

3

Registered Devices

Connect Phone

Connect Portable Player

Detailed Bluetooth ® settings

To display the screen shown above, press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select “Setup”, select “Bluetooth

*

” on the “Setup” screen.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

559

Registered devices

Registering a Bluetooth ® devices

Bluetooth ® devices compatible with phones (HFP) and portable players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. Phones (HFP) and portable players (AVP) (maximum of 5) can be registered.

1

2

Display the “Bluetooth

*

” screen. ( 

P. 558)

Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth

*

” screen.

3 Select “Add New” to register a

Bluetooth ® device to the system.

When 5 Bluetooth ® devices have already been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted.

Select “Yes” to delete one or more.

Select the device to be deleted, then select “Remove”, and then

“Yes”.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

560

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

4 Input the passcode displayed on the screen into the

Bluetooth ® device.

A passcode is not required for SSP

(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth ® devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth ® phone being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth ® phone’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth ® phone according to the confirmation message.

For the operation of the

Bluetooth ® device, see the manual that comes with it.

If you want to cancel it, select “Cancel”.

If a completion message is displayed, registration is complete.

If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Removing a Bluetooth ® device

1

2

Display the “Bluetooth

*

” screen. ( 

P. 558)

Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth

*

” screen.

3

4

Select “Remove” on the “Registered Devices” screen.

Choose the desired device.

You can select multiple device and delete them at the same time.

To remove all devices, select

“Select All”.

561

5 Select “Remove”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

Editing a Bluetooth ® device

You can see the information of the Bluetooth ® device on the system or edit.

● Changing a device name

1 Display the “Bluetooth

*

” screen. ( 

P. 558)

2 Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth

*

” screen.

3 Select “Details”.

5

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

562

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

4 Select the device to be edited.

5 Select “Device Name”.

6 Input the device name, and select “OK”.

7 Confirm the device name and select “OK”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

● Setting portable player connection method

1 Display the “Bluetooth

*

” screen. ( 

P. 558)

2 Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth

*

” screen.

3

4

5

Select “Details” on the “Registered Devices” screen.

Select the device to be edited.

Select “Connect Portable

Player from”.

563

6 Select the desired connection method, and select “OK”.

“Vehicle”: Select to connect the audio system to the portable player.

“Portable Player”: Select to connect the portable player to the audio system.

Depending on the portable player, the “Vehicle” or “Portable Player” connection method may be best.

As such, refer to the manual that comes with the portable player.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

564

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Editing the “Device Name”

If you change a device name, the name registered in your cellular phone is not changed.

■ About “Device Address”

The address peculiar to the system. It cannot be changed. If you have registered two

Bluetooth ® phones with the same device name and you cannot distinguish one from the other, refer to this address.

■ “My Phone Number”:

The phone number of the Bluetooth ® phone is displayed on the screen. Depending on the type of phone, the phone number may not be displayed.

■ “Profiles”:

The compatibility profile of the Bluetooth ® device is displayed on the screen.

■ “Connect Portable Player from”:

There are 2 portable player connection settings available; “Vehicle” and “Portable

Player”.

■ When you delete a Bluetooth ® phone

The phonebook data will be deleted at the same time.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

565

Selecting a Bluetooth

®

phone

If multiple Bluetooth ® phones are registered, follow the procedure below to select the Bluetooth ® phone to be used. You can only use one phone at a time.

1

2

Display the “Bluetooth

*

” screen. ( 

P. 558)

Select “Connect Phone” on the “Bluetooth

*

” screen.

3 Choose the phone to be connected.

The Bluetooth ® mark is displayed when you connect the phone.

If a completion message is displayed, connection is complete.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

5

■ When another Bluetooth phone

® device is connected during registering or selecting a

● When another Bluetooth ® device is connected, a confirmation message will be displayed. If you want to disconnect it, select “Yes”.

● The currently connected Bluetooth ® phone’s screen button will have a Bluetooth ® mark displayed on it. If the currently connected Bluetooth is selected, the Bluetooth ®

® phone’s screen button

phone can be disconnected. Select “Yes” to disconnect.

■ Connecting the phone while Bluetooth ® audio is playing

Bluetooth ® audio will stop temporarily.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

566

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Selecting a portable player

If multiple portable players are registered, follow the procedure below to select the portable player phone to be used. You can only use one portable player at a time.

1

2

Display the “Bluetooth

*

” screen. ( 

P. 558)

Select “Connect Portable Player” on the “Bluetooth

*

” screen.

3 Choose the portable player to be used.

The Bluetooth ® mark is displayed when you connect the portable player.

If a completion message is displayed, connection is complete.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

■ When another Bluetooth portable player

® device is connected during registering or selecting a

● When another Bluetooth ® device is connected, a confirmation message will be displayed. If you want to disconnect it, select “Yes”.

● The currently connected portable player’s screen button will have a Bluetooth ® mark displayed on it. If the currently connected portable player’s screen button is selected, the portable player can be disconnected. Select “Yes” to disconnect.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Detailed Bluetooth

settings

You can confirm and change the Bluetooth ® settings.

Page 1

Page 2

567

1

2

3

4

5

Changing the device connection status

Changing the name of the connected device.

Changing the passcode that you registered your Bluetooth ® device in the system

The address peculiar to the system

You cannot change this address. If the same device name is displayed on the screen of your device, refer to it.

The compatibility profile of the Bluetooth ® device

To display the screen above, follow the steps below.

1 Display the “Bluetooth

*

” screen. ( 

P. 558)

2 Select “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” on the “Bluetooth

*

” screen.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

568

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Changing Bluetooth

*

power

The Bluetooth

*

device is automatically connected when you turn the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode. You can change between “On” or “Off”.

1

2

Display the “Detailed Bluetooth

*

Settings” screen. ( 

P. 567)

Select “Bluetooth

*

Power” on the “Detailed Bluetooth

*

Settings” screen.

3 Select “On” or “Off”, and then

“Save”.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

Editing the device name

1 Display the “Detailed Bluetooth

*

Settings” screen. ( 

P. 567)

2

3

Select “Device Name” on the “Detailed Bluetooth

*

Settings” screen.

Input the device name, and select “OK”.

4 Select “Save” on the “Detailed Bluetooth

*

Settings” screen.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Editing the passcode

1

2

Display the “Detailed Bluetooth

*

Settings” screen. ( 

P. 567)

Select “Passcode” on the “Detailed Bluetooth

*

Settings” screen.

3 Input a passcode, and select

“OK”.

569

4 Select “Save” on the “Detailed Bluetooth

*

Settings” screen.

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

■ Bluetooth ® device connection status display settings

When “Bluetooth

*

Power” is “On” and the power switch is in ACCES-

SORY or ON mode, the Bluetooth ® phone and portable player’s connection status can be displayed.

( 

P. 568)

1

2

Display the “Detailed Bluetooth

*

Settings” screen. ( 

P. 567)

Select “Display Phone Status” or “Display Portable Player Status” on the “Detailed Bluetooth

*

Settings” screen.

3 Select “On”, and then “Save”.

5

*

: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

570

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ While driving

You cannot change the state of “Bluetooth but it can be changed from “Off” to “On”.

*

Power” from “On” to “Off” while driving,

■ To return to the default Bluetooth ® settings

Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.

If the state of “Bluetooth nection will begin.

*

Power” is changed from “Off” to “On”, Bluetooth ® con-

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior lights list

5-5. Using the interior lights

571

1

2

4

3

5

Outer foot lights

Shift lever light

Interior light (

P. 572)

Front personal lights

(

P. 572)

Inside door handle lights

6

7

8

9

Rear personal lights (

P. 572)

Ornament lights

Door courtesy lights

Power window switch lights

10

Footwell lights

When the instrument panel light control switch is turned to minimum and the tail lights are on, the inside door handle lights, the ornament lights and the footwell lights will turn off. (

P. 91)

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

572

5-5. Using the interior lights

1

2

Interior light

Turns the light on/off

The rear personal lights are also turned on/off by the interior light operation. However, if the interior light is turned off after being turned on while the rear personal lights are turned on, the rear personal lights will not turn off simultaneously.

Turns the door position on

Personal lights

■ Front

Turns the light on/off

■ Rear

Turns the light on/off

If the lights are turned on by interior light operation, the lights cannot turn off by pressing the switch.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-5. Using the interior lights

573

■ Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to power switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/closed.

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

If the interior lights remain on when the power switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

■ Customization

Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

P. 807)

NOTICE

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

574

5-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features

1

2

3

Cup holders

Glove box

(

P. 578)

(

P. 576)

Auxiliary boxes (if equipped)

(

P. 580)

Ashtrays (if equipped)

(

P. 585)

4

5

Auxiliary boxes (

P. 580)

Console box (

P. 577)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-6. Using the storage features

575

CAUTION

■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.

● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

■ When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use

Keep the lids closed.

In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

576

5-6. Using the storage features

1

2

Glove box

3

Open (press the button)

Unlock with the mechanical key

Lock with the mechanical key

■ Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.

■ Trunk opener main switch

The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (

P. 142)

■ Removing the insert

The insert inside the glove box can be removed.

■ The glove box door

An SRS knee airbag for the front passenger’s seat is built into the glove box door.

(

P. 38)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1

2

Console box

Using with half-open

Grip the knob to release the lock, and slide the armrest as far back.

Using with fully open

Grip the knob to release the lock, and lift the armrest to open.

5-6. Using the storage features

577

■ Tray in the console box

The tray slides forward/backward and can be removed.

■ Console box light

The console box light turns on when the tail lights are on.

CAUTION

When using the console box with half-open, do not apply too much load on the armrest. Doing so may damage the armrest and may cause you to injure yourself.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

578

5-6. Using the storage features

Cup holders

Front

To open, press down and release the cup holder lid.

Rear

To open, pull down the armrest and press in and release the rear cup holder on the armrest.

■ Removing the separate tray (front cup holder)

The cup holder insert may be removed for cleaning.

■ When stowing the cup holders (rear cup holder)

Stow the cup holder with the armrest down. The cup holder cannot be stowed if the armrest is not down.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-6. Using the storage features

579

CAUTION

■ Items unsuitable for the cup holders

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the rear cup holder

Stow the cup holder before stowing the armrest.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

580

5-6. Using the storage features

Auxiliary boxes

Type A

Press in the button.

Type B

Pull up the lever to release the lock and lift the lid.

Type C (if equipped)

Open the lid.

CAUTION

■ Using the auxiliary boxes (type C)

Do not use the auxiliary box as an ashtray.

Doing so may cause a fire.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Trunk features

Cargo hooks

Raise the hooks when needed.

The cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.

5-6. Using the storage features

581

Luggage hook

Pull the strap when using the hook.

5

First-aid kit storage net

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

582

5-6. Using the storage features

Luggage mat

Pull the strap upwards to lift up the luggage mat.

1

2

Warning reflector storage belt

Loosen the belt

Tighten the belt

CAUTION

■ When the cargo hooks are not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.

NOTICE

■ Luggage hook weight capacity

Do not hang any object heavier than 11 lb. (5 kg) on the luggage hook.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

Sun visors and vanity mirrors

1

2

Sun visors

3

To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.

To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.

To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it backward.

Vanity mirrors

Slide the cover to open.

The light turns on when the cover is opened.

583

5

NOTICE

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the hybrid system is off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

584

Clock

5-7. Other interior features

The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.

1

2

Pressing and holding will move the clock hands backward.

Pressing and holding will move the clock hands forward.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Ashtrays

Open the ashtray lid.

To remove the ashtray, pull the ashtray lid upwards.

5-7. Other interior features

585

CAUTION

■ When not in use

Keep the ashtray closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open ashtray or ash flying out.

■ To prevent fire

● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.

● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.

5

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

586

5-7. Other interior features

Power outlets

The power outlets can be used for the following components:

12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.

120 V AC (if equipped): Accessories that use less than 100 W.

12 V

■ Front

Open the lid.

■ Rear (if equipped)

Open the lid.

120 V AC (if equipped for rear only)

Open the lid.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

587

■ The power outlets can be used when

12 V: The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

120 V AC: The power switch is in ON mode.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the power outlets

Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short circuit.

■ To prevent the fuse from being blown

12 V:

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.

120 V AC:

Do not use a 120 V AC appliance that requires more than 100W. If a 120 V AC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit will cut the power supply.

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

■ Appliances that may not operate properly (120 V AC)

The following 120 V AC appliances may not operate properly even if their power consumption is under 100 W:

● Appliances with high initial peak wattage

● Measuring devices that process precise data

● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

588

5-7. Other interior features

Heated steering wheel

The heated steering wheel heats the side grips of the steering wheel.

Turns the heater on/off

The indicator light comes on when the heater is operating.

■ Operating condition

The power switch is in ON mode.

■ Timer

The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.

■ If the indicator light flashes

Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel off and then press the button again. If the indicator light still flashes, a malfunction may be occurring. Turn the heated steering wheel off and have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

589

CAUTION

■ Burns

Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the steering wheel when the heated steering wheel is on:

● Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged

● Persons with sensitive skin

● Persons who are fatigued

● Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

NOTICE

■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged

Turn the switch off when the hybrid system is off.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

590

5-7. Other interior features

Seat heaters/seat ventilators

The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats.

Seat heaters

■ Front seats

Turns the seat heater on

1

Hi

2

13

Mid

Lo

4

Off

The indicator light (yellow) on the switch and the level indicator lights

(green) come on.

Rear seats (if equipped)

Turns the seat heater on

2

13

1

Hi

Mid

Lo

4

Off

The level indicator lights (yellow) come on.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Seat ventilators (front seats only)

4

13

2

1

Blows air from the seat

Hi

Mid

Lo

Off

The indicator light (green) on the switch and the level indicator lights

(green) come on.

5-7. Other interior features

591

■ The seat heaters/seat ventilators can be used when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■ The seat heater timer control

The seat heater automatically switches from Hi Mid  Lo Off. The switching timing differs depending on the temperature inside the cabin etc. when the seat heater was operated.

■ Automatic operation of the seat heater during Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. If the driving mode select switch is switched to Eco drive mode in cold temperatures, the seat heater may be automatically operated to assist heating performance.

■ Button lock function (vehicles with rear control panel)

To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.

(

P. 383)

■ Rear control panel illumination off function (vehicles with rear control panel)

Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. (

P. 383)

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

592

5-7. Other interior features

CAUTION

■ Burns

● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.

● Do not use seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor burns or overheating.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the seat heaters/seat ventilators

Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Turn the seat heaters/seat ventilators off when the hybrid system is off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Armrest

Fold down the armrest for use.

5-7. Other interior features

593

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not apply too much load on the armrest.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

594

5-7. Other interior features

Rear sunshade/rear door sunshades

Rear sunshade

The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the button shown below.

■ From the front seats

1

Pull up the lever to release the lock.

2

13

Slide the armrest.

Raise/lower

■ From the rear seats (if equipped)

Raise/lower

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Rear door sunshades

Pull the tab of the rear door sunshade and hook the shade on using the anchors.

To retract the rear door sunshade, unhook the shade and retract it slowly.

5-7. Other interior features

595

■ The rear sunshade can be used when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■ Operating the rear sunshade after the hybrid system is turned off

The rear sunshade can be operated for approximately 1 minute even after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.

■ Reverse operation feature

To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade automatically lowers when the shift lever is shifted to R.

However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:

● The button is pressed again.

*

● Shift the shift lever into P.

● The shift lever is shifted out of R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h).

If the hybrid system is off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the hybrid system is turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the button.

*

: Occasionally, the reverse function may not be carried out after the switch has been pressed. Repeat the above operation to operate the function.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

596

5-7. Other interior features

■ Button lock function (vehicles with rear control panel)

To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.

(

P. 383)

■ Rear control panel illumination off function (vehicles with rear control panel)

Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. (

P. 383)

■ Customization

Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates can be changed.

(Customizable features:

P. 807)

CAUTION

■ When the rear sunshade is being operated

Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening.

They may get caught, causing injury.

NOTICE

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not operate the rear sunshade when the hybrid system is off.

■ To ensure normal operation of the rear sunshade and rear door sunshades

Observe the following precautions.

● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components of the rear sunshade.

● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.

● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade and rear door sunshades.

● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.

● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously for long periods of time.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Coat hooks

The coat hooks are provided with the rear assist grips.

5-7. Other interior features

597

CAUTION

■ Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

598

5-7. Other interior features

Assist grips

An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.

CAUTION

■ Assist grip

Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.

Doing so could damage the assist grip, or could cause you to injure yourself by falling over.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the assist grip

Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Utility hook

To use the utility hook, push it on.

5-7. Other interior features

599

CAUTION

■ When not in use

Keep the utility hook stowed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

NOTICE

■ Utility hook weight capacity

Do not hang any object heavier than 4.4 lb. (2 kg) on the utility hook.

The utility hook may get damaged or the object hooked on the utility hook may fall down while driving.

5

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

600

5-7. Other interior features

Garage door opener

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.

The garage door opener (HomeLink tured under license from HomeLink

®

®

Universal Transceiver) is manufac-

.

2

1

Programming the HomeLink

®

(for U.S.A. owners)

The HomeLink

®

compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device.

Indicator light

Buttons

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

■ Programming HomeLink

®

1 Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in.

(25 to 75 mm) from the

HomeLink

®

buttons.

Keep the HomeLink

®

indicator light in view while programming.

5-7. Other interior features

2 Press and hold one of the

HomeLink

®

buttons and the transmitter button. When the

HomeLink

®

indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash, you can release both buttons.

If the HomeLink ® indicator light comes on but does not flash, or flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and remains lit, the HomeLink ® button is already programmed. Use the other buttons or follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink ® button” instructions. (

P. 604)

601

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

602

3

4

5-7. Other interior features

Test the HomeLink

®

operation by pressing the newly programmed button.

If a HomeLink ® button has been programmed for a garage door, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your garage transmitter is of the rolling code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink ® button. The remote control transmitter is of the rolling code type if the HomeLink ® indicator light flashes rapidly for

2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is the rolling code type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink

®

buttons.

■ Programming a rolling code system (for U.S.A. owners)

If your device is rolling code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming HomeLink ® ” before proceeding with the steps listed below.

1 Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener motor.

2

Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the training button.

Press the training button.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3

5-7. Other interior features

603

Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink

®

button for

2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage door may open.

If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the

HomeLink ® signal and operate the garage door.

4 Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink ® buttons.

■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a devices in the Canadian market

1

2

3

4

5

6

Place the remote control transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the HomeLink

®

buttons.

Keep the HomeLink

®

indicator light in view while programming.

Press and hold the selected HomeLink

®

button.

Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the remote control transmitter for 2 seconds each until step 4 is completed.

When the HomeLink

®

indicator light starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons.

Test the HomeLink

®

operation by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink

®

buttons.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks and lighting, contact your Lexus dealer for assistance.

■ Reprogramming a button

The individual HomeLink

®

buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a

HomeLink

®

button” instructions.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

604

5-7. Other interior features

Operating HomeLink

®

Press the appropriate HomeLink ® button. The HomeLink ® indicator light should come on.

The HomeLink

®

compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

Reprogramming a HomeLink

®

button

Press and hold the desired HomeLink

®

HomeLink

®

HomeLink

®

button. After 20 seconds, the

indicator light will start flashing slowly. Keep pressing the

HomeLink

®

button and press and hold the transmitter button until the

indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash. Release the buttons.

Erasing the entire HomeLink

®

memory (all three programs)

Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the

HomeLink ® memory.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

605

■ Before programming

● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.

● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from the

HomeLink ® button.

■ Certification for the garage door opener

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: NZLOBIHL4

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

■ When support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

606

5-7. Other interior features

CAUTION

■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.

■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink

®

compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.

This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

607

Safety Connect

Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses

Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.

By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and

Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.

1

2

System components

3

“SOS” button

LED light indicators

Microphone

5

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

608

5-7. Other interior features

Services

Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:

● Automatic Collision Notification

*

Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (

P. 610)

*

: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2

● Stolen Vehicle Location

Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (

P. 611)

● Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)

Connects drivers to response-center support. (

P. 611)

● Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (

P. 611)

Subscription

After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.

A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your

Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or push the

“SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

609

■ Safety Connect Services Information

● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth ®

Safety Connect.

technology will not be possible during

● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service

Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected.

● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States (except

Hawaii) and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the

United States in countries other than Canada.

● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications

Act and the device is not TTY compatible.

■ Languages

The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The

Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.

■ When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

610

5-7. Other interior features

Safety Connect LED light Indicators

When the power switch is turned to ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.

The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:

● Green indicator light on = Active service

● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process

● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction

(contact your Lexus dealer)

● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active

Safety Connect services

Automatic Collision Notification

In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

611

■ Stolen Vehicle Location

If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS

(1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.

In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com.

Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)

In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.

If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency.

■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.

Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside

Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect

Terms and Conditions, which are available at Lexus.com.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

612

5-7. Other interior features

Safety information for Safety Connect

Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.

■ Exposure to radio frequency signals

The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.

In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.

● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]

● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]

● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI

Standard (C95.1).

The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

613

■ Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect

FCC ID: O9EGTM1

FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

614

5-7. Other interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

6

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior.................. 616

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior ..................620

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements ...623

General maintenance..............626

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)

programs ................................... 630

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions................................. 631

Hood ...............................................634

Positioning a floor jack.............635

Engine compartment ............... 637

12-volt battery.............................. 647

Tires................................................... 651

Tire inflation pressure .................661

Wheels ...........................................664

Air conditioning filter ...............666

Electronic key battery..............668

Checking and replacing

fuses.............................................. 670

Headlight aim ..............................685

Light bulbs..................................... 687

615

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

616

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.

● Wipe away any water.

● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes

● Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.

● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint.

■ High pressure car washes

● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.

● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.

■ When using a car wash

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

● Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (

P. 127)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

617

■ Aluminum wheels

● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.

Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for long distance in the hot weather.

● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.

■ Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

■ Front side windows water-repellent coating (if equipped)

● The following precautions can extend the effectiveness of the water-repellent coating.

• Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side windows regularly.

• Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate on the windows for a long period.

Clean the windows with a soft, damp cloth as soon as possible.

• Do not use wax or glass cleaners that contain abrasives when cleaning the windows.

• Do not use any metallic objects to remove condensation build up.

● When the water-repellent performance has become insufficient, the coating can be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

618

6-1. Maintenance and care

CAUTION

■ When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.

■ When cleaning the windshield

Set the wipers to the intermittent windshield wipers. (

P. 221)

If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or other serious injuries and cause damage to the wiper blades.

● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is touched by hand

● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor

● If something bumps against the windshield

● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop sensor

■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes

Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

619

NOTICE

■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.)

● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface

• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights

● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■ When using an automatic car wash

Set the wipers to the intermittent windshield wipers. (

P. 221)

If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

620

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

Cleaning the leather areas

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth.

● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

621

■ Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

■ When cleaning the carpeted portions of the glove box, console box, etc.

If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet could be damaged.

CAUTION

■ Water in the vehicle

● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents, and in the trunk.

Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(

P. 40)

An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

622

6-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents

● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:

• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach

• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol

● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.

■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces:

● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.

● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with LKA [Lane-Keeping

Assist])

Be careful not to touch the camera sensor (

P. 251).

If the camera is accidentally scratched or hit, LKA may not operate properly or may cause a malfunction.

■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window

● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.

● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-2. Maintenance

623

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends performing the following maintenance:

General maintenance

General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.

Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and

Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.

Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Guide”,

“Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty

Booklet”.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

624

6-2. Maintenance

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

■ Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)

1

After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data.

To reset the data, follow the procedure described below:

Switch the display to the trip meter “A” (

P. 91) when the hybrid system is operat-

ing.

2

3

Turn the power switch off.

While pressing the “ODO TRIP” button (

P. 91), turn the power switch to the

ON mode (do not start the hybrid system because otherwise the reset mode will be canceled).

The message shown in the illustration will appear on the display.

Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays “000000”.

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer

● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-2. Maintenance

625

CAUTION

■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury.

■ Handling of the 12-volt battery

● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

● 12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (

P. 647)

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

626

6-2. Maintenance

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Items

Brake fluid

Engine/power control unit coolant

Engine oil

Exhaust system

Radiator/condenser

Washer fluid

Check points

Is the brake fluid at the correct level?

(

P. 645)

Is the engine/power control unit coolant at the correct level? (

P. 642)

Is the engine oil at the correct level?

(

P. 639)

There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.

The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects. (

P. 644)

Is there sufficient washer fluid?

(

P. 646)

Luggage compartment

Items

12-volt battery

Check points

Check the connections.

(

P. 647)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-2. Maintenance

627

Vehicle interior

Accelerator pedal

Items

Hybrid transmission “Park” mechanism

Brake pedal

Brakes

Check points

• The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).

• When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?

• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?

• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?

(

P. 789)

• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play?

(

P. 789)

• The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.

• The brakes should work effectively.

• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.

• The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

628

6-2. Maintenance

Items

Head restraints

Indicators/buzzers

Lights

Parking brake

Seat belts

Seats

Steering wheel

Check points

• Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?

• Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?

• Do all the lights come on?

• Are the headlights aimed correctly?

(

P. 685)

• Moves smoothly?

• When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?

• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?

• The seat belts should not be damaged.

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?

• Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play?

• There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-2. Maintenance

629

Vehicle exterior

Doors/trunk

Engine hood

Fluid leaks

Tires

Items Check points

• Do the doors/trunk operate smoothly?

• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?

• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?

• The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.

• Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?

• The wheel nuts should not be loose.

CAUTION

■ If the hybrid system is operating

Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

630

6-2. Maintenance

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include

OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:

● When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.

Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

● When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

631

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.

Brake fluid level

Engine oil level

Items

12-volt battery condition (

P. 647)

(

P. 645)

Engine/power control unit coolant level (

P. 642)

(

P. 639)

Parts and tools

• Grease

• Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

• “ Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, nonnitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

For the U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and

50% deionized water.

For Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and

45% deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

632

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Washer fluid

Items

Tire inflation pressure

Parts and tools

Fuses

Headlight aim

Light bulbs

(

P. 670) • Fuse with same amperage rating as

(

P. 685) • Phillips-head screwdriver

(

P. 687)

Radiator and condenser (

P. 644)

• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original

• Phillips-head screwdriver

• Flathead screwdriver

• Wrench

(

(

P. 661) • Tire pressure gauge

P. 646)

• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

633

CAUTION

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

■ When working on the engine compartment

● Make sure that the “POWER ON” on the multi-information display and the

“READY” indicator are both off.

● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

● Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flammable.

■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

Be sure the power switch is off.

With the power switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.

(

P. 644)

■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.

6

NOTICE

■ If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

634

Hood

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

1 Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.

CAUTION

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Positioning a floor jack

635

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.

Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

◆ Front

◆ Rear

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

636

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

■ When raising your vehicle

Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury:

● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustration.

● When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the jack.

● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.

● Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is supported only by the floor jack.

● Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.

● Do not start the hybrid system while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.

● Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.

● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.

Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.

● When raising the vehicle, do not place any object on top of or underneath the floor jack.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Engine compartment

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

637

1

2

4

3

Engine oil level dipstick

(

P. 639)

Engine coolant reservoir

(

P. 642)

Engine oil filler cap

(

P. 640)

Power control unit coolant reservoir (

P. 642)

5

6

7

8

9

10

Brake fluid reservoir

(

P. 645)

Fuse box (

P. 670)

Washer fluid tank (

P. 646)

Electric cooling fans

Condenser (

P. 644)

Radiator (

P. 644)

■ 12-volt battery

P. 647

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

638

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment cover

Removing the engine compartment cover

Right-hand side

Center

■ Installing the clips

1

Push up center portion

2

Insert

3

Press

NOTICE

■ Checking the engine compartment cover after installation

Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

639

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oil

1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

3

4

5

1

2

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

Low

Full

6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

640

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Engine oil selection

Oil quantity

(Low  Full)

Items

P. 785

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)

Clean funnel

1

2

3

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

■ Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.

● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine

● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used

● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently

● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

641

CAUTION

■ Used engine oil

● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.

Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■ When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

642

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.

■ Engine coolant reservoir

1

Reservoir cap

2

“FULL” line

3

“LOW” line

If the level is on or below the

“LOW” line, add coolant up to the

“FULL” line. (

P. 774)

■ Power control unit coolant reservoir

1

Reservoir cap

2

3

“FULL” line

“LOW” line

If the level is on or below the

“LOW” line, add coolant up to the

“FULL” line. (

P. 774)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

643

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31 F [-35C])

Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44 F [-42C])

For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

■ When the hybrid system is hot

Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps or the radiator cap.(

P. 777)

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

6

NOTICE

■ When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

644

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION

■ When the hybrid system is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Brake fluid

Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.

645

Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

Fluid type

Items

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Clean funnel

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.

Use only newly opened brake fluid.

CAUTION

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

6

NOTICE

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

646

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Washer fluid

If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

CAUTION

■ When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.

■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

12-volt battery

Location

The 12-volt battery is located on the left-hand side of luggage compartment.

647

Removing the 12-volt battery cover

Pull the strap upwards to lift up the

12-volt battery cover.

Exterior

Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

2

1

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

648

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Before recharging

When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging:

● If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.

■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery

● The hybrid system may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.

1

2

Shift the shift lever to P.

Open and close any of the doors.

3 Restart the hybrid system.

● Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.

● Start the hybrid system with the power switch in ACCESSORY mode. The hybrid system may not start with the power switch turned off. However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second attempt.

● The power switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the power switch mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the power switch before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the power switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.

If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at all methods above, contact your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

649

CAUTION

■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12volt battery:

● Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.

● Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.

● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.

● Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.

■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery

Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.

■ How to recharge the 12-volt battery

Observe the following precautions when recharging the 12-volt battery. Failure to do so may damage the 12-volt battery and cause death or serious injury.

● Slow charge: Recharge at a current of 5 A or less and make sure that the recharging period does not exceed a total of 12 hours.

● Quick charge: Recharge at a current of 15 A or less and make sure that the recharging period does not exceed 60 minutes.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

650

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

■ When replacing the 12-volt battery

Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas

(hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion.

For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE

■ When recharging the 12-volt battery

Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

651

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

1

2

Checking tires

3

New tread

Treadwear indicator

Worn tread

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or “ ” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.

Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

652

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.

Front

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

653

Tire pressure warning system

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.

Vehicles without the tire inflation pressure display function

If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a warning light. (

P. 715)

Vehicles with the tire inflation pressure display function

● If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a screen display and a warning light. (

P. 740)

● The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be displayed on the multi-information display. (

P. 97)

◆ Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (

P. 655)

◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system

■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:

● When rotating the tires.

● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight.

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

654

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the power switch off.

2

Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (

P. 790)

3

4

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

Turn the power switch to ON mode.

Press and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.

5 Wait for a few minutes with the power switch in ON mode and then turn the power switch off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

655

◆ Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Lexus dealer.

■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.

■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

■ When rotating the tires (vehicles with the tire inflation pressure display function)

Make sure that the power switch is off. If the tires are rotated while the power switch is in ON mode, the tire position information will not be updated.

If this accidentally occurs, either turn the power switch to off and then to ON mode, or initialize the system after checking that the tire pressure is properly adjusted.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

656

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Low profile tires (except 225/50R17 tires)

Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.

■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the

Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.

For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.

(

P. 795)

■ Tire types

● Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

● All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

● Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.

If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (

P. 319)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

657

■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly

● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

• If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.

• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.

• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.

• Tire chains etc. are equipped.

• Lock nuts are equipped.

• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.

• If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.

• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings.

• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.

● Performance may be affected in the following situations.

• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

Vehicles with the tire inflation pressure display function: If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions.

● When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be extended.

● When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not function.

■ The initialization operation

● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment.

● If you have accidentally turned the power switch off during initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the power switch has been turned to ON mode for the next time.

● If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct initialization again.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

658

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.

● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.

■ Tire pressure warning system certification

MODEL/FCC IDs:

Transmitter: PAXPMVC010

Initiator: HYQ22AAA

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

659

CAUTION

■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.

● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).

● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices (vehicles with the tire inflation pressure display function)

● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should not come within

17.7 in. (450 mm) of the tire pressure warning system initiators. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.

6

● Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

660

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps

● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.

● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves could be bound.

● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (

P. 653)

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

■ Low profile tires (except 225/50R17 tires)

Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:

● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely.

● Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.

■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Tire inflation pressure

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (

P. 790)

661

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

662

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

1

2

Inspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

1

2

3

4

5

6

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.

If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure.

If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Put the tire valve cap back on.

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

● Reduced fuel efficiency

● Reduced driving comfort and tire life

● Reduced safety

● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

663

■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality and handling.

● Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

CAUTION

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:

● Excessive wear

● Uneven wear

● Poor handling

● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

● Poor sealing of the tire bead

● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

6

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace them as soon as possible.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

664

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset

*

.

Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.

*

: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Lexus does not recommend using the following:

● Wheels of different sizes or types

● Used wheels

● Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions

● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.

● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

665

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (

P. 653)

CAUTION

■ When replacing wheels

● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the

Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.

Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.

● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

666

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

Removal method

1

2

Turn the power switch off.

Open the glove box. Lift up the side with the stay, disconnect the stay tabs and remove the partition by pulling horizontally.

3 Press the tabs and remove the filter cover.

4 Press the tabs and remove the filter case.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

5 Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one.

The “ UP” marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up.

667

■ Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s

Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)

■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

■ When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

668

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

You will need the following items:

● Flathead screwdriver

● Small flathead screwdriver

● Lithium battery CR2032

1

Replacing the battery

Take out the mechanical key.

2 Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

3 Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

669

■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery

● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

■ If the electronic key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly.

● The operational range will be reduced.

CAUTION

■ Removed battery and other parts

Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.

● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

670

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

1 Turn the power switch off.

2

3

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” for details about which fuse to check. (

P. 674)

Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment

Remove the engine compartment cover (

P. 638) and

remove all of the clips.

Push the tabs on either side to detach the lock and lift the lid off while pulling the lock plate.

When installing the lid, check that the lock plate and the tabs on either side are connected correctly.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driver’s side instrument panel

Remove the lid.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

671

Passenger’s side instrument panel

Remove the lid.

Trunk

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Remove the lid.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

672

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

The upper part of the 12-volt battery

Pull the strap upwards to lift up the 12-volt battery cover.

4 Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

673

5 Check if the fuse is blown.

1

Normal fuse

2

Blown fuse

Type A and B:

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type C and D:

Contact your Lexus dealer.

Type A

Type B

Type C

Type D

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

674

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse layout and amperage ratings

Engine compartment

1 IGN

Fuse

2 INJ

3 EFI NO.2

4 IG2 MAIN

5 EFI MAIN

6 A/F

7 EDU

8 F/PMP

9 H-LP RH-LO

10 H-LP LH-LO

Ampere

10 Starting system

Circuit

10

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

10 Air intake system, exhaust system

20

IGN, GAUGE, INJ, AIR BAG, IG2 NO.1,

LH-IG2

25

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, EFI NO.2

15 Air flow sensor

20

25

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

20 Right-hand headlight (low beam)*

20 Left-hand headlight (low beam)*

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Fuse

11 ABS MAIN 2

12 ABS MAIN 1

13 IGCT NO.1

14 ECU-B

15 INV W/P

16 ETCS

17 EPS-B

18 D/C CUT

19 HORN

20 ODS

21 TV

22 P/I-B NO.2

23 ABS NO.2

24 P/I-B NO.1

25 H-LP LO

26 LH J/B-B

27 RH J/B-B

28 VGRS

29 OIL PMP

30 IGCT NO.5

31 WIP-S

32 WASH-S

33 COMB SW

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

675

Ampere

10 Brake system

Circuit

10 Brake system

30

IGCT NO.2, IGCT NO.3, IGCT NO.4,

IGCT NO.5

7.5

Smart access system with push-button start

10 Hybrid system

10

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

10 Electric power steering system

30 DOME, MPX-B

10 Horn

5 Occupant classification system

7.5

Remote Touch screen

80 IG2 MAIN, EFI MAIN, EDU, F/PMP, A/F

30 ECB

50 H-LP HI RH, H-LP HI LH, DRL

30 H-LP LO RH, H-LP LO LH

40 Left-hand junction block

40 Right-hand junction block

40 No circuit

60 Oil pump

7.5

Power management system, shift position sensor

7.5

Windshield wipers, driver support system

5 Windshield washer, driver support system

5 Windshield wipers

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

676

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

34 DOME

35 MPX-B

36 IGCT NO.4

37 IGCT NO.3

38 IGCT NO.2

39 IG2 NO.1

40 GAUGE

41 DC/DC

42 P/I DC/DC

43 RH J/B DC/DC

44 LH J/B DC/DC

45 H-LP CLN

46 FAN NO.2

47 LUG J/B DC/DC

48 FAN NO.1

49 PTC NO.1

50 PTC NO.2

51 HTR

Ampere

7.5

Circuit

Personal lights, ornament lights, trunk light, footwell lights, door courtesy lights, vanity lights, rear door inside handle illuminations, power trunk opener and closer

10

Body ECU, smart access system with pushbutton start, electric tilt and telescopic steering column, power seats, head-up display, front door ECU, gauges and meters, steering sensor, yaw rate and G sensor, overhead module, RR CTRL SW, power trunk opener and closer, clock, CAN gateway ECU

10 Power control unit

7.5

Hybrid battery (traction battery), DC/DC converter

5 Hybrid system

5 DCM, CAN gateway ECU

5 Gauges and meters

150 RH-J/B DC/DC, P/I DC/DC

100

RR S/SHADE, DEFOG, FOG, TAIL,

PANEL

80 Right-hand junction block

50 Left-hand junction block

30 Headlight cleaner

40 Electric cooling fans

80 Luggage compartment junction block

80 Electric cooling fans

50 PTC heater

50 PTC heater

50 Air conditioning system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

677

Fuse

52 ABS NO.1

53 ECU-B NO.2

54 DEICER

55 ABS MAIN 3

56 FILTER

57 A/C W/P

58 SPARE

59 SPARE

60 SPARE

Ampere

30 ECB

Circuit

7.5

No circuit

25 Windshield wiper de-icer

10 Brake system

10 Condenser

7.5

Air conditioning system

10 Spare fuse

30 Spare fuse

20 Spare fuse

*

: Low beam and high beam are the same bulb. (vehicles with discharge headlights)

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

678

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Driver’s side instrument panel

Fuse

1 STOP

2 P/W-B

3 P/SEAT1 F/L

4 D/L NO.1

5 NV-IR

6 FL S/HTR

7 WIPER

8 WIPER-IG

9 LH-IG

10 LH ECU-IG

Ampere Circuit

7.5

Stop lights, high mounted stoplight

5 Power window master switch

30 Power seats

25 Power door lock system

10 Lexus night view

10 Seat heaters/ventilators

30 Windshield wipers

5 Windshield wipers

10

Seat belts, body ECU, AFS, overhead module, raindrop sensor, inside rear view mirror, lane camera sensor (LKA), head-up display, shift lock system, intuitive parking assist, front left-hand door ECU, driver monitor system,

Remote Touch screen, electric tilt and telescopic steering column, power seats, moon roof, windshield wiper de-icer, intuitive parking assist switch, PTC heater, headlight cleaner

10

VDIM, ECB, D-SW MODULE (Blind Spot

Monitor, heated steering wheel), driver support system, AFS, EPB, air conditioning system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Fuse

11 DOOR FL

12

CAPACITOR

(HV)

13 STRG LOCK

14 D/L NO.2

15 DOOR RL

16 HAZ

17 LH-IG2

18 LH J/B-B

19 S/ROOF

20 P/SEAT2 F/L

21 TI & TE

22 A/C

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

679

Ampere

30

Circuit

Outside rear view mirror defoggers, power window (front left-hand)

10 Capacitor

15 Steering lock system

25 Power door lock system

30 Power window (rear left-hand)

15 Turn signal lights, emergency flashers

10

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, stop lights, smart access system with push-button start, steering lock system, brake system, power management system

7.5

Body ECU

20 Moon roof

25 Power seats

20 Electric tilt and telescopic steering column

7.5

Air conditioning system

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

680

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Passenger’s side instrument panel

Fuse

1 P/SEAT1 F/R

2 FR P/OUTLET

3 RR P/OUTLET

4 P/SEAT2 F/R

5 AVS

6 STRG HTR

7 WASH

8 RH ECU-IG

9 RH-IG

10 DOOR FR

11 DOOR RR

12 RAD NO.2

13 AM2

Ampere

30 Power seats

15 Power outlet (front)

15 Power outlet (rear)

25 Power seats

20 AVS

Circuit

15 Heated steering wheel

20 Windshield washer

10

10

Navigation system, pre-collision seat belts, air conditioning system, ECB, Lexus night view, yaw rate and G sensor

Tension reducer, seat heater/ventilator switches, front right-hand door ECU, CAN gateway ECU, tire pressure warning system, power seats

30

Front right-hand door control system (outside rear view mirror defoggers, power window)

30 Power window (rear right-hand)

30 Audio system

7.5

Power management system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Fuse

14 MULTIMEDIA

15 RAD NO.1

16 AIR BAG

17 OBD

18 ACC

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

681

Ampere Circuit

10 Navigation system, Remote Touch

30 Audio system

10

SRS airbag system, occupant classification system

7.5

On-board diagnosis system

7.5

Body ECU, head-up display, RR CTRL, navigation system, hybrid transmission, Remote

Touch, DCM, Remote Touch screen, clock

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

682

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Trunk

Fuse

1 PSB

2 PTL

3 RR J/B-B

4 RR S/HTR

5 FR S/HTR

6 RR FOG

7 DC/DC-S (HV)

8 BATT FAN (HV)

9 SECURITY

10 ECU-B NO.3

11 TRK OPN

12 DCM (HV)

13 AC INV (HV)

14 RR-IG1

15 RR ECU-IG

16 EPS-IG

17 BACK UP

Ampere Circuit

30 Pre-collision seat belts

25 Power trunk opener and closer

10 Smart access system with push-button start

20 Seat heaters (rear)

10 Seat heaters/ventilators (front)

10 No circuit

7.5

DC/DC converter

20

Hybrid battery (traction battery) cooling fan system

7.5

SECURITY

7.5

Parking brake

7.5

Power trunk opener and closer

7.5

DCM

20 Power outlet (120V AC)

5 Radar sensor, Blind Spot Monitor

10

Power trunk opener and closer, parking brake, tension reducer (rear left-hand), RR

CTRL SW, tire pressure warning system

5 Electric power steering system

7.5

Back-up lights

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ The upper part of the 12-volt battery

*

683

Fuse

1 EPB

2 LUG-J/B BATT

3 EPS

4 ARS

5 MAIN

Ampere Circuit

30 Parking brake

40 Luggage compartment junction block

80 Electric power steering

80 No circuit

220 Engine compartment junction block

*

: When one or more of the fuses in this unit are blown, the unit needs to be replaced as a whole.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

684

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ After a fuse is replaced

● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (

P. 687)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

■ When replacing light bulbs

Lexus recommends that you use genuine Lexus products designed for this vehicle.

Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, nongenuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.

CAUTION

■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

This can cause extensive damage or even fire.

● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE

■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Headlight aim

Vertical movement adjusting bolts

Discharge headlights

LED headlights

685

2

1

Adjustment bolt A

Adjustment bolt B

Before checking the headlight aim

1

2

3

4

Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gasoline and the area around the headlight is not deformed.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Sit in the driver’s seat.

Bounce the vehicle several times.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

686

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Adjusting the headlight aim

1 Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, turn bolt A in either direction.

Remember the turning direction and the number of turns.

Discharge headlights

LED headlights

2 Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step

1 .

If the headlight cannot be adjusted using this procedure, take the vehicle to your

Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.

Discharge headlights

LED headlights

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

687

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.

For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your

Lexus dealer.

Preparing for light bulb replacement

Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (

P. 791)

Removing the engine compartment covers

P. 638

Bulb locations

■ Front

Vehicles with discharge headlights

6

2

1

Front turn signal light

Fog light (if equipped)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

688

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Vehicles with LED headlights

1

2

Fog light (if equipped)

Front turn signal light

■ Rear

1

2

Back-up light

Rear turn signal light

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Replacing light bulbs

Fog lights (if equipped)

1 To allow enough working space, turn the steering wheel to the opposite side of the bulb to be replaced.

Remove the 2 fender liner clips.

2

Turn the steering wheel to the left when replacing the right side light bulb, and turn the steering wheel to the right when replacing the left side light bulb.

To take out the clips, turn the head of the clip to unlock, then remove by pulling.

While holding the clamp open, pull and remove the tabs and open the fender liner.

689

6

3 Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

690

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

5 Set the new light bulb.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert. Turn it clockwise to set.

6 Set the connector.

After installing the connector, shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the fog lights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

7 Reinstall the fender liner and install the clips.

Insert the clips and turn to lock.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front turn signal lights (vehicles with discharge headlights)

1 For the left side only: To allow enough working space, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, then remove the bolts and take off the cover.

691

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Right side

Left side

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

692

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

3 Remove the light bulb.

4 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

After installing the bulb base, secure the cord with the clips and install the cover

*

in its original position.

*

: For the left side only

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front turn signal lights (vehicles with LED headlights)

1

For the left side only: Remove the bolt and move the washer fluid filler opening.

693

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

3 Remove the light bulb.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

694

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

After installing the bulb base, secure the cord with the clips and if replacing the left side bulb, make sure to install the bolt for the washer fluid filler opening in its original position.

Right side

Left side

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear turn signal lights

1 Open the trunk lid and remove the cover.

695

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

3 Remove the light bulb.

6

4 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

After installing the bulb base, secure the cord with the clips and install the cover in its original position.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

696

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Back-up lights

1 Open the trunk lid.

2 For the left side (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer only): Pry out each side of the trunk closer switch in turn by inserting a screwdriver into the base.

3

To prevent damage, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Remove the clips on whichever side you are replacing and open the cover of the trunk lid.

4 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

5 Remove the light bulb.

6 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

697

■ Replacing the following bulbs

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your

Lexus dealer.

● Headlights

● Parking lights and daytime running lights

● Front side marker lights

● Side turn signal lights

● Stop/tail lights

● Tail lights

● Rear side marker lights

● High mounted stoplight

● License plate lights

● Outer foot lights

■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)

If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored.

■ LED Lights

The lights other than the discharge headlights (if equipped), fog lights (if equipped), front turn signal lights, rear turn signal lights, back-up lights and outer foot lights each consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your

Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.

■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.

● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.

● Water has built up inside the headlight.

■ When replacing light bulbs

P. 684

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

698

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

■ Replacing light bulbs

● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion.

If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

● Vehicles with discharge headlights: While the headlights are turned on, and for a short time after they have been turned off, metal components at the rear of the headlight assembly will be extremely hot. To prevent burns, do not touch these metal components until you are certain they have cooled down.

Metal components

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

699

CAUTION

■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)

● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing the discharge headlights (including light bulbs).

● Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights are turned on.

An extremely high voltage of 30000 V will be discharged and could result in death or serious injury by electric shock.

● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the headlight bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.

Doing so could result in electric shock and death or serious injury.

■ To prevent damage or fire

● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

● Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.

6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

700

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

7

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers...................702

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency....703

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs

to be towed................................ 704

If you think

something is wrong................. 710

If a warning light turns on or

a warning buzzer sounds........ 711

If a warning message

is displayed ..................................721

If you have a flat tire....................749

If the hybrid system

will not start.................................762

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P ......................764

If the parking brake cannot

be released.................................765

If the electronic key does not

operate properly...................... 767

If the 12-volt battery

is discharged............................. 770

If your vehicle overheats ..........774

If the vehicle becomes

stuck ............................................. 778

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

701

702

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road to a breakdown, etc.

Press the switch.

All the turn signals will flash.

To turn them off, press the switch once again.

■ Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is not operating (while the “READY” indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may discharge.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-1. Essential information

703

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:

1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.

2

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

3

4

If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

Stop the hybrid system.

3

4

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.

To stop the hybrid system, press and hold the power switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.

Press and hold for 2 seconds or more or press briefly 3 times or more

5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

7

CAUTION

■ If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the hybrid system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

704

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or flat bed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer before towing.

● The hybrid system is operating but the vehicle will not move.

● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at under 18 mph

(30 km/h).

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

1

2

Installing towing eyelet

Take out the towing eyelet (

P. 750)

Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.

To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration.

705

3 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

4 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

706

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

From the front

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

From the rear

Turn the power switch to ACCES-

SORY mode so that the steering wheel is unlocked.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Using a flat bed truck

If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.

707

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45 .

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

708

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Before emergency towing

1 Release the parking brake.

2

3

Shift the shift lever to N.

Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY (hybrid system off) or ON (hybrid system operating) mode.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Caution while towing

● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.

● If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.

If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

709

NOTICE

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear with the power switch off. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

● When raising the vehicle from the rear, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear.

■ To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

710

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal.

Audible symptoms

● Changes in exhaust sound

● Excessive tire squeal when cornering

● Strange noises related to the suspension system

● Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system

Operational symptoms

● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly

● Appreciable loss of power

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

711

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

Warning light Warning light/Details

(U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the electronically controlled brake system

(Canada)

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

712

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details

Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The hybrid system;

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system; or

• The electronic hybrid transmission control system

SRS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system;

• The front passenger occupant classification system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system

(U.S.A.)

ABS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system

(Canada)

Electric power steering system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

713

Warning light

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

Warning light/Details

Pre-collision system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system

The warning light will operate as follows, even when the system is not malfunctioning:

• The light will flash quickly when the system is operating.

(

P. 296)

• The light will turn on when the pre-collision system is disabled. (

P. 297)

• The light will flash when the system cannot temporarily be used. (

P. 735)

Slip indicator

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The VSC system; or

• The TRAC system

The light will flash when the VSC or the TRC system is operating.

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

“AFS OFF” indicator

Indicates a malfunction in the adaptive front-lighting system

(Flashes)

Brake hold operated indicator

Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system

7

(Flashes)

(U.S.A.) Parking brake indicator

Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system

(Flashes)

(Canada)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

714

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The electronically controlled brake system;

• The regenerative braking system; or

• The parking brake system

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light goes off.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Open door warning light

(warning buzzer)

*

1

Indicates that a door or the trunk is not fully closed

Low fuel level warning light

Indicates remaining fuel is approximately 2.6 gal. (10.0

L, 2.2 Imp.gal.) or less

Correction procedure

Check that all the doors and the trunk are closed.

Refuel the vehicle.

Seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)

*

2

Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts

Fasten the seat belt.

If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) off.

Master warning light

A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.

P. 721

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Warning light

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light/Details Correction procedure

715

Tire pressure warning light

When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pressure such as

• Natural causes (

P. 717)

• Flat tire (

P. 749)

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.

The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.

When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:

Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system

Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.

*

1 : Open door warning buzzer:

P. 728

*

2 : Driver’s seat belt buzzer:

The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:

The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

716

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors

(rear), driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (

P. 40)

■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

● Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

● Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient of the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

717

■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.

■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly

P. 657

■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the power switch is turned to ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.

■ Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

718

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.

If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate using more force than usual.

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

719

CAUTION

■ Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

720

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

■ Precaution when installing a different tire

When differently constructed tires or tires of different makers, models or tread patterns are installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning message is displayed

721

If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:

1

2

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.

Multi-information display

If any of the warning light comes on again after the following actions have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

Warning message Details

7

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Indicates the following:

• The brake fluid level is low; or,

• The brake system is malfunctioning.

A buzzer also sounds.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

722

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message Details

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The regenerative brake system;

• The electronically controlled brake system; or

• The electric parking brake

A buzzer also sounds.

Stop the vehicle immediately.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

Warning message Details

Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure

The warning light may come on if the engine oil pressure is too low.

Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

723

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Warning message Details

(Flashes)

Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist

The malfunctioning assist-sensor is flashing.

7

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the dynamic radar cruise control system (if equipped) or the cruise control system

Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

724

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message Details

Indicates a malfunction in the LKA (Lane-Keeping

Assist)

(If equipped)

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the LED headlight system

Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the adaptive front-lighting system

(If equipped)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Warning message

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Details

725

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system;

• The front passenger occupant classification system; or,

• The seat belt pretensioner system

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The ABS; or,

• The brake assist system

(Flashes)

Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system

7

Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system

Depress the brake pedal.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

726

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message Details

(Flashes)

(U.S.A.)

(Flashes)

(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system

Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power

Steering) system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Details

727

Warning message

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor

Indicates a malfunction in the smart access system with push-button start

(Flashes)

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

728

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message goes off.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed

The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed.

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5

Make sure that all the doors are closed.

and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the door(s) are not yet fully closed.

Indicates that the hood is not fully closed

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5

Close the hood.

and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the hood is not yet fully closed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Warning message

(Flashes)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

729

Details

Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5

Correction procedure and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk is not yet fully closed.

Close the trunk.

Indicates that the windows are not fully closed

(with the power switch off, and the driver’s door open)

Close all the windows.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed

(with the power switch off, and the driver’s door open)

Close the moon roof.

7

(Flashes)

Indicates that the windows and the moon roof are not fully closed (with the power switch off, and the driver’s door open)

Close all the windows and the moon roof.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

730

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message Details

Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph

(5 km/h), flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged.

Correction procedure

Release the parking brake.

(Flashes)

(U.S.A.)

(Flashes)

(Canada)

(Flashes)

Indicates that the parking brake system has overheated

Wait until the system cools down.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the brake hold system is not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep incline

Use the brake hold system when it becomes available.

Indicates that the brake hold system is unable to cancel the brake hold function

Depress the brake pedal.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Warning message

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Details Correction procedure

731

Indicates that the brake hold system is not available

The reason the brake hold system is not available may be displayed.

• Close the driver’s door.

• Fasten the driver’s seat belt.

• Close the trunk and hood.

Indicates that the brake hold system is not available

The reason the brake hold system is not available may be displayed.

• Depress the brake pedal.

• Close the driver’s door.

• Fasten the driver’s seat belt.

7

(Flashes)

Indicates that the parking brake is set automatically while the brake hold system is holding the brakes

Release the parking brake.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

732

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashes)

Details Correction procedure

Indicates that the hybrid battery (traction battery) is low

When stopping the vehicle for a long period of time, shift the shift lever to

P. The battery cannot be charged with the shift lever in N.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the hybrid battery (traction battery) power has dropped because a long period of time has elapsed after shifting the shift lever to

N

Restart the hybrid system when starting the vehicle.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the gasoline engine cannot operate or the shift lever is in

N for a long time

Stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to P.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the accelerator pedal is depressed while the shift position is in N

Release the accelerator pedal and shift the shift lever to D or R.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Warning message

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

733

Details

Indicates that the EV drive mode is not available

*

The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the vehicle is idling, battery charge is low, speed is higher than the EV drive mode operating speed range, accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed.

Indicates that the EV drive mode has been automatically canceled

*

The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the battery charge is low, speed is higher than the EV drive mode operating speed range, accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed.

Correction procedure

Use the EV drive mode when it becomes available.

Drive the vehicle for a while.

7

Indicates that engine oil level is low

Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary.

*

: For the EV drive mode operating conditions:

P. 196

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

734

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message Details Correction procedure

Indicates that intuitive parking assist sensor is dirty or covered with ice

Clean the sensor.

(If equipped)

Indicates that the radar sensor is dirty or covered with ice

Clean the sensor.

(If equipped)

(If equipped)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the radar cruise control system is unable to judge vehicleto-vehicle distance

• Turn off the snow mode.

• If the windshield wipers are on, turn them off or set them to a mode other than

AUTO or high speed wiper operation.

Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in vehicle-to-vehicle distance mode)

At the same time, will appear on the head-up display (the image flashes).

Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Warning message

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

(If equipped)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

735

Details

Indicates that there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, or that the precollision braking function is operating

At the same time,

will appear on the head-up display too (the image flashes).

Indicates that the LKA

(Lane-Keeping Assist) is suspended

• The camera sensor temperature is higher than the operation temperature range.

• The power steering system operation is restricted.

Correction procedure

Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.

Restart the LKA after driving for a while.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

736

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(If equipped)

(If equipped)

Details

Alerts the driver that the vehicle is out of the lanes

(while the LKA [Lane-

Keeping Assist] system is operating)

The warning buzzer sounds continuously.

The lane markings and/ or the steering wheel marking flash.

At the same time,

will appear on the head-up display (part of the image flashes).

Indicates that the LKA

(Lane-Keeping Assist) system detects nohanded driving (while the lane keeping assist function is operating)

The warning buzzer sounds twice.

Correction procedure

Check around the vehicle and back to inside of the lane markings.

Grip the steering wheel firmly.

(If equipped)

Indicates that the Blind

Spot Monitor sensors or the surrounding area on the bumper is dirty or covered with ice

Clean the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper.

Indicates that the hybrid system has overheated

This message may be displayed when driving under severe operating conditions. (For example, when driving up a long steep hill.)

Stop and check.

(

P. 774)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Warning message

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

737

Details Correction procedure

Indicates that the hybrid system output is limited because the engine oil is overheated

Drive the vehicle at a safe speed until the warning message disappears.

Indicates that the vehicle is unable to drive over 65 mph (110 km/h) until the transmission warms up

Wait until the transmission warms up.

(Flashes)

Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.6

gal. (10.0 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.) or less

Refuel the vehicle.

Indicates that the power switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on

Turn the lights off.

7

(Flashes)

Indicates that the driver’s door was opened with the shift position in any position other than P

Shift the shift position to P.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

738

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Warning message in radar cruise mode (if equipped)

In the following cases, the warning message may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance decreases:

● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle

● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed

● Immediately after cruise control speed is set

● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed

■ The LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) lane departure warning function

In the following cases, the warning message will not be displayed even if a lane line is crossed.

● When the vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LKA system functions

● When the lane lines cannot be recognized

● When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to cause the vehicle to change lanes

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

739

Follow the correction procedures.

A warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message goes off.

Warning message Details

Indicates that the brake hold system is not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a slippery road

Correction procedure

Use the brake hold system when it becomes available.

Indicates that the washer fluid level is low

Add washer fluid.

(U.S.A. only)

Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule

*

should be performed soon.

Comes on approximately 4500 miles

(7200 km) after the maintenance data has been reset.

If necessary, perform maintenance.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

740

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(U.S.A. only)

Details

Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule

*

.

Comes on approximately 5000 miles

(8000 km) after the maintenance data has been reset.

(The indicator will not work properly unless the maintenance data has been reset.)

Correction procedure

Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the maintenance data after the maintenance is performed

(

P. 624)

Indicates that the tire inflation pressure is low

Check the tire inflation pressure, and adjust to the appropriate level.

(If equipped)

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn the power switch off then on again.

If the tire pressure warning indicator flashes for 1 minute then illuminates, there is a malfunction in the system. Have the vehicle inspected at your

Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

741

Warning message

(If equipped)

Details

Indicates that the tire position information cannot be recognized

Correction procedure

Drive for a short while and check if the display updates.

If the radio wave conditions improve, the display may return to normal. If the tire pressure is still not displayed after driving for several minutes, stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the power switch off then on again, and start driving.

If the tire pressure is still not displayed even after repeating this several times, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer.

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the pre-collision system is not currently functional because the grille cover or the sensor is dirty

This message also appears when the precollision system is not functional due to overheating.

Check the grille cover and the sensor and clean them if they are dirty.

In case of overheating, the system will become functional once the system cools down.

*

: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

742

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the malfunction repaired immediately.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message and light go off.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Warning message Details

Correction procedure

Once 

(Flashes)

The electronic key is not detected when an attempt is made to start the hybrid system.

Start the hybrid system with the electronic key present.

Once

3 times

(Flashes)

The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and a door other than the driver’s door was opened and closed while the power switch was in a mode other than off.

The driver’s door was opened and closed while the electronic key was not in the vehicle, the shift lever was in

P and the power switch was not turned off.

Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.

Turn the power switch off or bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message Details

743

Correction procedure

Once

Continuous

(Displayed alternately)

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the power switch off when the shift lever was in P.

Turn the power switch off and lock the doors again.

9 times

Continuous

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to drive when the regular key was not inside the vehicle.

Confirm that the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

The driver’s door was opened when the shift lever was not in P and the power switch was not turned off.

Shift the shift lever to

P.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

744

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Warning message Details

Correction procedure

Continuous

Continuous

Once

Continuous

Continuous

(Displayed alternately)

(Flashes)

The driver’s door was opened and closed while the electronic key was not in the vehicle, the shift lever was not in P and the power switch was not turned off.

• Shift the shift lever to P.

• Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to lock the doors using the smart access system with push-button start while the electronic key was still inside the vehicle.

An attempt was made to lock either front door by opening a door and putting the inside lock button into the lock position, then closing the door with the electronic key still inside the vehicle.

Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.

Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Once 

Once 

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashes)

745

Details

Correction procedure

• When the doors were unlocked with the mechanical key and then the power switch was pressed, the electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle.

• The electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle even after the power switch was pressed two consecutive times.

Touch the electronic key to the power switch while depressing the brake pedal.

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to start the hybrid system with the shift lever in an incorrect position.

Shift the shift lever to

P and start the hybrid system.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

746

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Warning message

 

Details

Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function.

Correction procedure

Next time when starting the hybrid system, increase the engine speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery.

Once 

The electronic key has a low battery.

Replace the electronic key battery.

(

P. 668)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Once 

Once 

Once 

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

747

Details

Correction procedure

The driver’s door was opened and closed with the power switch turned off and then the power switch was put in ACCES-

SORY mode twice without the hybrid system being started.

During an hybrid system starting procedure in the event that the electronic key was not functioning properly

(

P. 768), the

power switch was touched with the electronic key.

Press the power switch while depressing the brake pedal.

Press the power switch within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding.

The steering lock could not be released within 3 seconds of the power switch being pressed.

Press the power switch while depressing the brake pedal and moving the steering wheel left and right.

7

(Flashes)

The power switch has been turned off with the shift lever in a position other than P or N.

Shift the shift lever to

P.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

748

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Warning message

Once 

(Flashes)

Details

Correction procedure

After the power switch has been turned off with the shift lever in a position other than P, the shift lever has been shifted to P.

Turn the power switch off.

■ Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

If you have a flat tire

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

749

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire provided.

For details about tires:

P. 651

CAUTION

■ If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle

● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.

● Set the parking brake.

● Shift the shift lever to P.

● Stop the hybrid system.

● Turn on the emergency flashers. (

P. 702)

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

750

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

1

2

4

3

Jack handle

Parking brake release tool

Screwdriver

Towing eyelet

6

7

5

Wheel nut wrench

Spare tire

Jack

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

751

CAUTION

■ Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions.

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury.

● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

● Put the jack properly in its jack point.

● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.

● Do not start the hybrid system or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.

● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

752

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

1

2

Taking out the jack and jack handle

Remove the center luggage mat. (

P. 582)

Remove the spacer and take out the jack handle from the reverse side of the center luggage mat.

3

2

1

Take out the jack.

For tightening

For loosening

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

1

2

Taking out the spare tire

Remove the center luggage mat. (

P. 582)

Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

753

CAUTION

■ When storing the spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

754

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

1

Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

Front

Rear

Flat tire

Left-hand side

Right-hand side

Left-hand side

Right-hand side

Wheel chock positions

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Behind the rear left-hand side tire

In front of the front right-hand side tire

In front of the front left-hand side tire

2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

3 Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

4 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

755

5 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

756

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

■ Replacing a flat tire

● Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident.

Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m,

10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.

• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

757

1

Installing the spare tire

Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.

2 Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

When replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Tapered portion

Disc wheel seat

When replacing an aluminum wheel with an aluminum wheel, turn the wheel nuts until the washers come into contact with the disc wheel.

Disc wheel

7

Washer

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

758

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

3 Lower the vehicle.

4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque:

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

5 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

759

■ The compact spare tire

● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall.

Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.

(

P. 790)

■ When using the compact spare tire

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

■ When the compact spare tire is equipped

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires.

■ If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice

Install the compact spare tire on one of the front wheels of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the rear tires:

1

2

3

Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.

Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehicle.

Fit tire chains to the rear tires.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

760

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

■ When using the compact spare tire

● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

● Do not use more than one compact spare tires simultaneously.

● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

■ When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

• ABS & Brake assist

• VSC

• TRAC

• Cruise control

• Dynamic radar cruise control

(if equipped)

• PCS (if equipped)

• EPS

• AFS (if equipped)

• AVS

• LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)

(if equipped)

• Rear view monitor system

• Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)

• Navigation system (if equipped)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

761

CAUTION

■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■ After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

NOTICE

■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

■ When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

762

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the hybrid system will not start

Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:

The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting procedure is being followed. (

P. 189)

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (

P. 768)

● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

● There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (

P. 79)

● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.

● The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid system. (

P. 763)

The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (

P. 770)

● The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

763

The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected.

● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (

P. 770)

Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

Emergency start function

1

2

When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the power switch is functioning normally:

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to P.

3

4

Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode.

Press and hold the power switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

764

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:

1

2

3

4

Set the parking brake.

Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode.

Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool.

To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

5 Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the parking brake cannot be released

765

In the event that the 12-volt battery is discharged or switch operation does not release the parking brake, the parking brake can be released manually using the procedure below. This procedure should be performed only if necessary, such as in an emergency.

If the switch cannot be operated even when the 12-volt battery is normal, the parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Before releasing the parking brake manually

● Shift the shift lever to P.

● Turn the power switch off.

● Check that the parking brake indicator is off.

● Chock the tires.

1

Releasing the parking brake manually

Take out the parking brake release tool and the screwdriver from the trunk. (

P. 750)

Fit the parking brake release tool into the screwdriver handle.

7

2 Take out the spare tire. (

P. 749)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

766

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

3 Remove the plug.

4 Insert the tool and press it down firmly while turning it counterclockwise until it stops.

■ Manual operation of the parking brake

The parking brake cannot be set manually.

CAUTION

■ When releasing the parking brake manually

● Shift the shift lever to P, turn the power switch off and chock the tires. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move, resulting in an accident.

● Turn the power switch off and check that the parking brake indicator is off. Failure to do so may cause the system to operate and turn the inserted parking brake release tool, resulting in an injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

767

If the electronic key does not operate properly

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (

P. 128) or the electronic key cannot be used because the

battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened and the hybrid system can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions

Doors

Use the mechanical key

(

P. 118) in order to perform the

following operations:

1

Locks all the doors

2

Closes the windows and moon roof

*

(turn and hold)

Unlocks the door

3

Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver’s door. Turning the key once again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.

4

Opens the windows and moon roof

*

(turn and hold)

*

: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

768

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Trunk

Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.

Starting the hybrid system

1

2

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.

Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the power switch.

3

4

The power switch will turn to ON mode.

When the smart access system with push-button start is deactivated in customization setting, the power switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode.

Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that multi-information display.

Press the power switch.

is shown on the

In the event that the hybrid system still cannot be started, contact your

Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

769

■ Stopping the hybrid system

Shift the shift lever to P and press the power switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system.

■ Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (

P. 668)

■ Changing power switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the power switch in step above.

The hybrid system does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed.(

P. 190)

3

■ When the electronic key does not work properly

● Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.

(Customizable features

P. 807)

● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (

P. 127)

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

770

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the 12-volt battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the

12-volt battery is discharged.

You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.

1

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a

12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.

Open the trunk lid and remove the 12-volt battery cover.

In the event that the trunk opener cannot be used, use the mechanical key to open the trunk. (

P. 767)

2 Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

1

2

4

3

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on your vehicle

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

771

3

4

5

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.

Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the power switch off.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the power switch to ON mode.

6

7

Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer.

Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.

Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged

The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.

● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

■ Charging the 12-volt battery

The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while the hybrid system is operating.)

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

772

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery

● Make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery to prevent the doors from being locked with the key left inside the vehicle when the alarm operates.

● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access system with push-button start when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.

● The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.

● The power switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch off.

If you are unsure what mode the power switch was in before the 12-volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

CAUTION

■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:

● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.

● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal.

● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.

● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12volt battery.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

773

CAUTION

■ 12-volt battery precautions

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery:

● When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any 12-volt battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

● Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.

● In the event that 12-volt battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

● Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

● Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.

■ After recharging the 12-volt battery

Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.

■ When replacing the 12-volt battery

P. 650

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

774

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating:

● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone:

The engine may be overheating.

● “Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information display:

The power control unit may be overheating.

Correction procedures

■ If the needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone

1

2

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.

Check to see if steam is coming out from the engine area.

3

If you see steam:

Stop the hybrid system. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the hybrid system.

If you do not see steam:

Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood.

Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.

If the fans are operating:

Wait until the engine coolant temperature gauge begins to fall and then stop the hybrid system.

If the fans are not operating:

Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

4 After the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently, check the engine coolant level and inspect the cooling system for leaks.

If the engine compartment cover needs to be removed:

P. 638

5 Add engine coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable. (

P. 787)

775

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ If “Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information display

1

2

3

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.

Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood.

Check if the cooling fans are operating.

If the fans are operating:

Wait until the “Hybrid System Overheat” message disappears and then stop the hybrid system.

If the message does not disappear, call your Lexus dealer.

If the fans are not operating:

Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Lexus dealer.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

776

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

4 After the hybrid system has cooled down, check the power control unit coolant level and inspect the cooling system for leaks.

If the engine compartment cover needs to be removed:

P. 638

5 Add power control unit coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if power control unit coolant is unavailable. (

P. 787)

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ Overheating

If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating:

● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced.

● “Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information display.

● Steam comes out from under the hood.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

777

CAUTION

■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.

● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.

● Keep hands and clothing away from the fans, etc. while the hybrid system is operating.

● For vehicles with a hybrid system, there are times when the gasoline engine automatically starts to run or the cooling fans suddenly start to operate. Do not touch or approach the rotating parts of the belt or fans. Doing so may lead to fingers, clothes or tools getting caught, resulting in injury.

● Do not loosen the radiator cap or the coolant reservoir caps while the hybrid system and radiator are hot.

High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.

NOTICE

■ When adding engine/power control unit coolant

Add coolant slowly after the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.

■ To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).

● Do not use commercially available coolant additives.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

778

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

1

2

3

4

5

Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to

P.

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.

Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to help provide traction.

Restart the hybrid system.

Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press to turn off TRAC.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

779

CAUTION

■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.

● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

780

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Vehicle specifications

8

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.)................... 782

Fuel information.......................... 792

Tire information........................... 795

8-2. Customization

Customizable features ............807

8-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize..........................818

781

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

782

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weight

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

*

Wheelbase

Tread

*

Front

Rear

Vehicle capacity weight

(Occupants + luggage)

*

: Unladen vehicle

190.7 in. (4845 mm)

72.4 in. (1840 mm)

57.3 in. (1455 mm)

112.2 in. (2850 mm)

62.0 in. (1575 mm)

62.6 in. (1590 mm)

825 lb. (370 kg)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

783

Vehicle identification

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the engine compartment.

This number is also on the Certification Label.

Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

784

Engine

8-1. Specifications

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

Valve clearance

(engine cold)

Drive belt tension

3.5 L 6-cylinder (2GR-FXE)

6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

3.70  3.27 in. (94.0  83.0 mm)

210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm 3 )

Automatic adjustment

Automatic adjustment

Fuel

Fuel type

Octane Rating

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

Premium unleaded gasoline only

91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher

17.5 gal. (66.3 L, 14.6 Imp.gal.)

Electric motor (traction motor)

Type

Maximum output

Maximum torque

Permanent magnet synchronous motor

147 kW

275 N•m (28.0 kgf•m, 202.8 ft•lbf)

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

Type

Voltage

Capacity

Quantity

Overall voltage

Nickel-Metal hydride battery

7.2 V/module

6.5 Ah (3HR)

40 modules

288 V

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

785

Lubrication system

Oil capacity

Drain and refill (Reference

*

)

With filter

Without filter

6.7 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 Imp.qt.)

6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 Imp.qt.)

*

: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

786

8-1. Specifications

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 0W-20 is not available,

SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.

However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.

Outside temperature

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and

Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

787

Cooling system

Capacity

Gasoline engine

Power control unit

9.9 qt. (9.4 L, 8.3 Imp.qt.)

Coolant type

3.3 qt. (3.1 L, 2.7 Imp.qt.)

Use either of the following:

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based nonsilicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system

Spark plug

Make

Gap

DENSO FK20HBR8

0.031 in. (0.8 mm)

NOTICE

■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

788

8-1. Specifications

Electrical system

12-volt battery

Open voltage at 68 F

(20 C):

12.6

 12.8 V Fully charged

12.2

 12.4 V Half charged

11.8  12.0 V Discharged

(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the hybrid system and all lights are turned off.)

Charging rates

Quick charge

Slow charge

15 A max.

5 A max.

Hybrid transmission

Fluid capacity

Fluid type

*

6.01 qt. (5.69 L, 5.01 Imp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*

: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.

If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE

■ Hybrid transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

789

Differential

Oil capacity

Oil type and viscosity

1.43 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT

75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent

Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Oil” at the factory.

Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

Brakes

Pedal clearance

*

Pedal free play

Brake pad wear limit

Parking brake lining wear limit

Fluid type

4.5 in. (115 mm) Min.

0.04 — 0.08 in. (1.0 — 2.0 mm)

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

*

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112.4 lbf (500 N,

51.0 kgf) while the hybrid system is operating.

When performing the brake pedal inspection, also be sure to check that the brake system warning light is not illuminated when the hybrid system is operating

(If the brake system warning light is illuminated, refer to P. 711).

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

790

8-1. Specifications

Tires and wheels

Type A

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

225/50R17 94W

Front tire

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

Rear tire

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

2 or bar)

2 or bar)

17  7 1/2J

76 ft • lbf (103 N • m, 10.5 kgf • m)

Type B

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

235/45R18 94Y, P235/45R18 94V

Front tire

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

Rear tire

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

2

or bar)

2

or bar)

18  8J

76 ft • lbf (103 N • m, 10.5 kgf • m)

Compact spare tire

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

T155/70D17 110M, T145/70D18 107M

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm 2 or bar)

17  4T (T155/70D17), 18  4T (T145/70D18)

76 ft • lbf (103 N • m, 10.5 kgf • m)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Light bulbs

Exterior

Interior

Light Bulbs

Discharge headlights

*

Fog lights

*

Front turn signal lights

Rear turn signal lights

Back-up lights

Outer foot lights

Door courtesy lights

Vanity lights

Trunk light

A: D4S discharge bulbs

B: H11 halogen bulbs

C: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

*

: If equipped

8-1. Specifications

Bulb No.

W

35

55

7444NA 28/8

21

16

W21W

W16W

W5W

5

5

8

3.8

D

D

D

C

Type

A

B

C

D

D

791

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

792

8-1. Specifications

Fuel information

You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.

Select premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91

(Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If 91 octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number

91). Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking and significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of

ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.

■ Gasoline quality standards

● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide.

● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels.

In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.

● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

793

■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.

● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems.

■ Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.

Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline

● Use only gasoline containing a maximum of

10% ethanol.

DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E15, E30,

E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol.

(15% ethanol)

(50% ethanol)

(85% ethanol)

● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than

87.

● Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing

MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.

■ If your engine knocks

● Consult your Lexus dealer.

● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

794

8-1. Specifications

NOTICE

■ Notice on fuel quality

● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.

● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.

At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

Full-size tire

8-1. Specifications

795

Compact spare tire

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

796

8-1. Specifications

4

1

2

3

Tire size

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Location of treadwear indicators

(

P. 798)

(

P. 797)

(

P. 651)

Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires

5

A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a biasply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

6

7

8

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(

P. 802)

(

P. 802)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Uniform tire quality grading

9

10

11

For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

Summer tires or all season tires (

P. 656)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.

“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

3

4

1

2

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT symbol

*

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

5

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

6

Manufacturing week

7

Manufacturing year

*

: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards.

797

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

798

8-1. Specifications

Tire size

Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

1

Tire use

(P = Passenger car,

T = Temporary use)

2

3

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio

(tire height to section width)

4

Tire construction code

(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

5

6

7

Load index

(2 digits or 3 digits)

Speed symbol

(alphabet with one letter)

Tire dimensions

1

Section width

2

Tire height

3

Wheel diameter

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Tire section names

2

3

4

6

1

5

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

7

8

9

10

11

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

8-1. Specifications

799

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

800

8-1. Specifications

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

■ DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

■ Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

801

■ Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

802

8-1. Specifications

Glossary of tire terminology

Rim

Tire related term

Cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum inflation pressure

Recommended inflation pressure

Accessory weight

Curb weight

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

Normal occupant weight

Occupant distribution

Production options weight

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of hybrid transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment

(whether installed or not)

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(c) Vehicle capacity weight

(d) Production options weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1

*

that follows

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1

*

below

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

803

Tire related term

Rim diameter

(Wheel diameter)

Rim size designation

Meaning

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim type designation

Rim width

Vehicle capacity weight

(Total load capacity)

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Vehicle normal load on the tire

Weather side

Bead

Bead separation

Bias ply tire

Carcass

Chunking

Cord

Cord separation

Cracking

Rim diameter and width

The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Nominal distance between rim flanges

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 dividing by two

*

below), and

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

The strands forming the plies in the tire

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

804

8-1. Specifications

CT

Tire related term

Extra load tire

Groove

Innerliner

Innerliner separation

Intended outboard sidewall

Light truck (LT) tire

Load rating

Maximum load rating

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

Measuring rim

Open splice

Outer diameter

Meaning

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Tire related term

Overall width

Passenger car tire

Ply

Ply separation

Pneumatic tire

Radial ply tire

Reinforced tire

Section width

Sidewall

Sidewall separation

Snow tire

8-1. Specifications

805

Meaning

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard

Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test

Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a

Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

806

8-1. Specifications

Tread

Tire related term

Test rim

Tread rib

Tread separation

Treadwear indicators

(TWI)

Wheel-holding fixture

Meaning

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

*

: Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants

2 through 4

5 through 10

Vehicle normal load,

Number of occupants

2

3

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

11 through 15

16 through 20

5

7

2 in front

2 in front, 1 in second seat

2 in front, 1 in second seat,

1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

2 in front, 2 in second seat,

2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-2. Customization

807

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. These preferences can be changed by using the “DISP” button, by using the Remote Touch, or at your Lexus dealer.

Customizing vehicle features

Changing by using the Remote Touch

Vehicles without a navigation system

1

2

“Vehicle Settings” screen displayed on the Remote Touch screen.

(

P. 336)

Select “Vehicle Customization” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.

“Vehicle Customization” screen will appear.

3

4

5

Choose a category displayed on the screen to display the settings.

Select the setting to be changed. Change each setting.

For items that can be enabled/disabled, and for items with an operating time that can be changed, select “On” or “Off”, or select the desired operating time.

For items with sensor sensitivity that can be changed, select “+” or “-” to choose the desired level, then select “OK”.

A message indicating that the settings are being saved will appear.

Do not perform any other operations while this message is displayed.

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

808

8-2. Customization

Vehicles with a navigation system

Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

Changing by using the “DISP” button

P. 98

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-2. Customization

809

Customizable features

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

1

Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch

2

Settings that can be changed using the “DISP” button

3

Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer

Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available

Item Function

Default setting

Customized setting 1 2 3

“Language”

“Units”

*

1

*

1

Multi-information display

(

P. 94)

“ECO lamp”

“Drive monitor”

“Tachometer Settings”

“Lamp brightness”

“SPORT lamp”

“English”

(French)

— O —

“miles

(MPG)”

“ON

(Self-lighting)”

“Outside”

(Spanish)

“km

(km/L)”

“km

(L/100km)”

“OFF”

“ON

(Always)”

“Fuel consumption”

“Cruising range”

— O —

— O —

— O —

“ON

(Selfchanging)”

“HV Meter

(Always)”

“Tachometer

(Always)”

— O —

“Standard” “Bright” — O —

“ON” “OFF” — O —

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

810

8-2. Customization

(

Item

Multi-information display

(

P. 94)

Function

“EV driving Indicator”

“Default settings”

Door lock

P. 137,

767)

Default setting

“ON”

“OFF”

Customized setting

1 2 3

“OFF” — O —

“ON” — O —

“Unlock on Second Key

Turn”

(Allows all doors to be unlocked by turning the mechanical key twice in the driver’s door)

On

(Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps)

Off

(All doors unlocked in one step)

O — O

“Auto Lock by Speed”

(All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph [20 km/h] or higher)

“Auto Lock by Shift from P”

(All doors are automatically locked when shifting the shift lever to position other than P)

“Auto Unlock by Shift to P”

(All doors are automatically unlocked when shifting the shift lever to P)

“Auto Unlock by Driver

Door”

(All doors are automatically unlocked when driver’s door is opened)

Off

On

On

Off

On

Off

Off

On

O — O

O — O

O — O

O — O

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Item Function

Smart access system with push-button start

(

P. 121)

and wireless remote control

(

P. 134)

Smart access system with push-button start

(

P. 121)

“Lock/Unlock Feedback-

Tone”

(Adjust the volume of buzzer sounds)

“Lock/Unlock Feedback-

Lights”

(Enable/disable the operation of the emergency flashers when the vehicle is locked or unlocked)

“Auto Relock Timer”

(Adjust the time elapsed before the automatic door lock function is activated if a door is not opened after being unlocked)

Open door reminder buzzer (When locking the vehicle)

“Access System with Elec.

Key”

(Smart access system with push-button start can be disabled)

“Select Doors to Unlock”

(The doors that are unlocked using the smart access system with pushbutton start can be selected)

Number of consecutive door lock operations

Default setting

5

8-2. Customization

On

60 seconds

On

On

Driver’s door

2 times

Customized setting

Off

1 to 7

Off

Off

30 seconds

120 seconds

Off

Off

All the doors

811

1 2 3

O — O

O — O

O — O

— — O

O — O

O — O

As many as desired

— — O

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

812

(

(

(

(

Item

Wireless remote control

P. 134)

Front seats

P. 148)

Power

8-2. Customization

windows

P. 164)

and moon roof

P. 167)

Function

Wireless remote control

“Remote 2-Press Unlock”

(Allows all doors to be unlocked by pressing

on the electronic key twice)

Trunk unlocking operation

Alarm (panic mode)

“Driver’s Seat Easy Exit”

(Driver’s seat movement when exiting the vehicle)

Selecting the door linking driving position memory with door unlock operation

Mechanical key linked operation

Default setting

On

Customized setting

Off

On

(Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps)

Off

(All doors unlocked in one step)

1 2 3

— — O

O — O

Press and hold (short)

On

One short press

Push twice

Press and hold (long)

Off

Off

— — O

— — O

Standard

Driver’s door

Off

Off

Partial

All doors

On

O — O

— — O

— — O

Wireless remote control linked operation

Off

On

(Open only)

— — O

Buzzer sounds if operated using wireless remote control

On Off — — O

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Item Function

Turn signal lever

(

P. 205)

The number of times the turn signal lights flash automatically when the turn signal lever is moved to the first position during a lane change

(After flashing the turn signal lights when turning left or right while this function is off and the turn signal lever is moved to the first position in direction of the flashing light, the turn signal lights can be selected to be flashing or off.)

8-2. Customization

Default setting

Customized setting

813

1 2 3

5

3

7

Off

(the turn signal lights keep flashing if the turn signal lever is moved to the first position in direction of flashing light)

Off

(the turn signal lights will be off if the turn signal lever is moved to the first position in direction of flashing light)

— — O

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

814

8-2. Customization

Item Function

Default setting

Customized setting

1 2 3

“Headlamps-On Sensitivity”

(Adjust the sensitivity of the ambient light sensor)

Automatic light control system

(

P. 213)

“Headlamps Auto-Off

Timer”

(Adjust the time elapsed before the headlights automatically turn off)

Standard

30 seconds

-2 to 2 O — O

Off

60 seconds

90 seconds

O — O

Lights

(

P. 213)

Welcome light illumination control

“Daytime Running Lights”

(Daytime running lights can be disabled)

*

3

Intuitive parking assist

*

2

(

P. 261)

“Detection (Front)”

(Detection distance of the front center sensor)

“Detection (Rear)”

(Detection distance of the rear center sensor)

“Alert Volume”

(Alert volume can be adjusted)

“Display”

(when intuitive parking assist is operating)

Automatic air conditioning system

(

P. 364)

“Auto A/C Mode”

(A/C Auto switch operation)

“Smog Sensor Sensitivity”

(Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity)

On

On

Far

Far

3

Off

Off

— — O

O — O

Near O — O

Near O — O

1 to 5 O — O

All sensors displayed

Display off O — O

On

Standard

Off O — O

-3 to 3 O — O

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Item Function

Interior lights illumination control

“Interior Lights Off Timer”

(Time elapsed before the interior lights turn off)

Illumination

(

P. 571)

Operation after the power switch is turned off

Operation when the doors are unlocked

Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person

Footwell lighting

Outer foot lights

8-2. Customization

815

Default setting

On

15 seconds

On

Customized setting

1 2 3

Off — — O

7.5 seconds

30 seconds

Off

O — O

— — O

On

On

On

On

Off

Off

— — O

— — O

“Exterior Lights Off Timer”

(Time elapsed before the outer foot lights turn off)

15 seconds

Off

Off

Off

7.5 seconds

30 seconds

— — O

— — O

O — O

8

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

816

8-2. Customization

Item

Illumination

(

P. 571)

Function

Enable/disable operation of the outer foot lights when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person

Enable/disable operation of the outer foot lights when the doors are unlocked with the power door lock switch

Reverse operation

Rear sunshade

(

P. 594)

Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates

Default setting

On

On

On

0.7 seconds

Customized setting

1 2 3

Off

Off

Off

0 second

0.9 seconds

1.2 seconds

— — O

— — O

— — O

— — O

*

1 : The default setting varies according to countries.

*

2 : If equipped

*

3 : U.S.A. only

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-2. Customization

817

■ Vehicle customization

● When the “Auto Lock by Speed” and “Auto Lock by Shift from P” are both on, the door lock operates as follows.

• When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will be locked.

• If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the “Auto Lock by Speed” would not operate.

• If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the “Auto Lock by Speed” will operate.

● When the smart access system with push-button start is off, the “Select Doors to

Unlock” cannot be customized.

● When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the “Auto Relock

Timer” activates, the signals will be generated in accordance with the “Lock/

Unlock Feedback-Tone” and the “Lock/Unlock Feedback-Lights” settings.

■ When customizing using the Remote Touch

Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P.

Also, to prevent 12-volt battery discharge, leave the hybrid system operating while customizing the features.

CAUTION

■ During customization

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

8

NOTICE

■ During customization

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while customizing features.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

818

8-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:

Item

Maintenance data

Tire pressure warning system

When to initialize

• After the maintenance is performed

• When rotating the tires

• When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.

Reference

P. 624

P. 654

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For owners

9

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners.....................................820

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

(in French)............................................... 821

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

(in French).............................................823

819

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

820

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

(Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or

Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E.,

Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

821

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in

French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in

English.

Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité

● Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre entièrement l’épaule; elle ne doit cependant pas toucher le cou ni glisser de l’épaule.

● Placez la ceinture abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.

● Réglez la position du dossier.

Tenez-vous assis bien au fond du siège, le dos droit.

● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.

Guide des ceintures de sécurité (sièges latéraux arrière)

Pour les enfants ou les personnes de taille inférieure à la moyenne, faites glisser le guide de la ceinture de sécurité vers l’avant, de sorte que la ceinture épaulière ne repose pas près du cou de cette personne.

9

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

822

Entretien et soin

Ceintures de sécurité

Avec un chiffon ou une éponge, nettoyez à l’aide d’un savon doux et de l’eau tiède. Vérifiez aussi les ceintures régulièrement pour vous assurer qu’elles ne présentent pas d’usure excessive, d’effilochage ou de coupures.

ATTENTION

■ Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité

Vérifiez périodiquement le système de ceintures de sécurité. Assurez-vous qu’il n’y a pas de coupures, d’effilochures ni de pièces desserrées. N’utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Les ceintures de sécurité endommagées ne peuvent pas protéger les occupants contre les blessures graves, voire mortelles.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in

French)

823

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in

English.

9

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

824

◆ Coussins gonflables SRS avant

2

1

Coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur/Coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant

Peuvent protéger la tête et la poitrine du conducteur et du passager avant contre les impacts avec des composants intérieurs

Coussins gonflables SRS de protection des genoux

Peuvent aider à protéger le conducteur et le passager avant

Un coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux pour le siège du passager avant est intégré dans la porte de la boîte à gants.

◆ Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et en rideau

3

4

Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant

Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges avant

Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux arrière

Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges latéraux arrière

Coussins gonflables SRS en rideau

Peuvent aider à protéger principalement la tête des occupants des sièges latéraux

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS

825

1

2

4

5

6

7

3

8

Système de classification de l’occupant du siège du passager avant (ECU et capteurs)

Capteurs de choc latéral

(portières avant)

Coussins gonflables de protection des genoux

Coussin gonflable du passager avant

Coussins gonflables en rideau

Voyants “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR

BAG OFF”

Dispositifs de tension et limiteurs de force des ceintures de sécurité

Capteurs de choc latéral

(avant)

10

11

9

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

Coussins gonflables latéraux avant

Lampe témoin SRS

Coussin gonflable du conducteur

Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière

Capteurs de choc latéral

(arrière)

Capteur de position de siège du conducteur

Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité du conducteur

Module de capteur de coussin gonflable

Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité du passager avant

Capteurs de choc avant

9

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

826

Votre véhicule est doté de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS dont la conception s’appuie sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules à moteur américains (FMVSS208). Le module de capteur de coussin gonflable

(ECU) contrôle le déploiement des coussins gonflables en fonction des informations obtenues des capteurs et d’autres éléments affichés dans le diagramme des composants du système ci-dessus. Ces informations comprennent des données relatives à la gravité de l’impact et aux passagers. Au moment du déploiement des coussins gonflables, une réaction chimique se produit dans les gonfleurs et les coussins gonflables se remplissent rapidement d’un gaz non toxique pour limiter le mouvement des occupants.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

827

ATTENTION

■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

Observez les précautions suivantes en ce qui concerne les coussins gonflables

SRS.

Les négliger pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécurité de la manière appropriée.

Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires qui doivent être utilisés de concert avec les ceintures de sécurité.

● Le coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur se déploie avec une force considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. La National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA), aux États-Unis, donne les recommandations suivantes :

La zone à risque d’un coussin gonflable côté conducteur couvre 2 à 3 in. (50 à

75 mm) de la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable. Pour assurer une marge de sécurité suffisante, restez à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable.

Cette distance est mesurée depuis le centre du volant jusqu’à votre sternum. Si vous vous tenez à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs manières :

• Reculez votre siège à la position maximale vous permettant d’atteindre encore aisément les pédales.

• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.

Même si les véhicules sont conçus différemment, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent maintenir une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même si le siège se trouve complètement vers l’avant, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier du siège vers l’arrière. Si la visibilité avant est moindre après avoir incliné le dossier du siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et non glissant pour être assis plus haut ou relevez le siège si cette option est disponible sur votre véhicule.

• Si votre volant est réglable en hauteur, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous permet d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers la tête et vers le cou.

Le siège doit être réglé de la manière recommandée ci-dessus par la NHTSA, tout en gardant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, et la vue sur les commandes du tableau de bord.

9

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

828

ATTENTION

■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

● Si la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité a été reliée à la boucle des ceintures de sécurité des sièges avant sans avoir été attachée à la plaque de blocage des ceintures de sécurité, les coussins gonflables SRS avant considéreront que le conducteur et le passager avant portent tout de même leur ceinture même si elles ne sont pas attachées. Les coussins gonflables SRS avant peuvent alors ne pas s’activer correctement lors d’une collision, ce qui représente un risque de blessures graves, voire mortelles. Bouclez toujours votre ceinture de sécurité lorsque vous utilisez la rallonge.

● Le coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec une force considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit se trouver le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable et le dossier doit être réglé de manière à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit.

● Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable risque d’infliger des blessures graves, voire mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis ou mal attachés. Un bébé ou un enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement retenu à l’aide d’un dispositif de retenue pour enfants. Lexus recommande vivement de placer et d’attacher correctement tous les bébés et tous les enfants sur les sièges arrière du véhicule à l’aide de dispositifs de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sécuritaires pour les bébés et les enfants que le siège du passager avant.

● N’installez jamais un dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos à la route sur le siège du passager avant, même si le voyant “AIR BAG OFF” est allumée.

En cas d’accident, la force et la vitesse de déploiement du coussin gonflable du passager avant sont telles qu’elles pourraient infliger à l’enfant des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le dispositif de retenue pour enfants du type dos à la route était installé sur le siège du passager avant.

● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et ne vous appuyez pas sur le tableau de bord.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

ATTENTION

■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

● Ne laissez pas un enfant se tenir face au coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant ni s’asseoir sur les genoux d’un passager avant.

● Ne laissez pas les occupants du siège avant tenir des objets sur leurs genoux.

● Ne vous appuyez pas sur la portière ou sur le brancard de pavillon, ni sur les montants avant, latéraux ou arrière.

● Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller face à la portière sur le siège du passager ni sortir la tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule.

● Ne fixez et n’appuyez rien sur des zones telles que la planche de bord, le tampon de volant, la partie inférieure du tableau de bord et la porte de la boîte à gants.

Ces objets peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables SRS du conducteur, du passager avant ou de protection des genoux se déploient.

● Ne fixez rien sur les portières, le pare-brise, les glaces latérales, les montants avant ou arrière, le brancard de pavillon et la poignée de maintien.

829

9

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

830

ATTENTION

■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

● N’accrochez pas de cintres ni d’objets rigides sur les crochets porte-vêtements.

Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et vous occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables

SRS en rideau.

● Si un recouvrement de vinyle est placé sur la zone de déploiement du coussin

SRS de protection des genoux, veillez à le retirer.

● N’utilisez pas d’accessoires recouvrant les parties du siège où les coussins gonflables SRS latéraux se déploient, car ceux-ci pourraient nuire au déploiement de ces coussins. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux de se déployer correctement, rendre le système inopérant ou provoquer accidentellement le déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux, occasionnant des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Ne frappez pas et n’appliquez pas une pression importante à l’emplacement des composants de coussins gonflables SRS.

Vous risquez de provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins gonflables

SRS.

● Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement après leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être chauds.

● Si vous avez de la difficulté à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS, ouvrez une portière ou une glace pour laisser entrer l’air, ou quittez le véhicule si vous pouvez le faire en toute sécurité. Dès que possible, nettoyez tous les résidus afin d’éviter les irritations cutanées.

● Si les emplacements de stockage des coussins gonflables SRS, notamment le tampon de volant, la porte de la boîte à gants et les garnitures des montants avant et arrière, sont endommagés ou fissurés, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

831

ATTENTION

■ Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables

SRS

Ne mettez pas le véhicule au rebut et n’effectuez aucune des modifications suivantes sans d’abord consulter votre concessionnaire Lexus. Les coussins gonflables

SRS pourraient fonctionner de manière incorrecte ou se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, ce qui serait susceptible d’occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Installation, retrait, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS

● Réparations, modifications, retrait ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, de la boîte à gants, des sièges ou du capitonnage des sièges, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière, ou des brancards de pavillon

● Réparations ou modifications de l’aile ou du pare-chocs avant, ou du côté de l’habitacle

● Installation de lames de déneigement, de treuils, etc. sur la calandre avant (barre safari, barre kangourou, etc.)

● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule

● Installation d’appareils électroniques tels qu’un émetteur-récepteur radio ou un lecteur de CD

● Modifications à votre véhicule pour une personne aux capacités physiques réduites

9

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

832

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

833

Index

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting)................................834

Alphabetical index................................ 840

For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation

System Owner’s Manual” for information regarding the navigation system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

834

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your

Lexus dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed

You lose your keys

● If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer. (

P. 119)

● If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

(

P. 120)

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (

P. 668)

● Is the power switch in ON mode?

When locking the doors, turn the power switch off. (

P. 190)

● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?

When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (

P. 128)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

835

The rear door cannot be opened

● Is the child-protector lock set?

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. (

P. 138)

The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside

● The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the trunk. (

P. 122)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

836

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you think something is wrong

The hybrid system does not start

● Did you press the power switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal? (

P. 189)

● Is the shift lever in P? (

P. 192)

● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle?

(

P. 124)

● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (

P. 193)

● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?

In this case, the hybrid system can be started in a temporary way. (

P. 768)

● Is the 12-volt battery discharged? (

P. 770)

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal

● Is the power switch in ON mode?

If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the power switch in ON mode (

P. 764)

The steering wheel cannot be turned after the hybrid system is stopped

● It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle.

(

P. 192)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

837

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches

● Is the window lock switch pressed?

The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (

P. 164)

The power switch is turned off automatically

● The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for a period of time. (

P. 192)

A warning buzzer sounds during driving

● The seat belt reminder light is flashing

Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts?

(

P. 714)

● The parking brake indicator is on

Is the parking brake released? (

P. 207)

Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. (

P. 711, 721)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

838

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

An alarm is activated and the horn sounds

● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?

The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (

P. 81)

To stop the alarm, turn the power switch to ON mode or start the hybrid system.

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle

● Is the message displayed on the multi-information display?

Check the message on the multi-information display.

(

P. 728)

A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed

● When a warning light turns on or a warning message is dis-

played, refer to P. 711, 721.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

839

When a problem has occurred

If you have a flat tire

● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. (

P. 749)

The vehicle becomes stuck

● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (

P. 778)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

840

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index

A

A/C............................................................ 364

Air conditioning filter....................... 666

Front automatic air conditioning

system ..................................................364

Rear air conditioning system........379

S-FLOW mode..................................374

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......289

Function ................................................. 289

Warning light .........................................712

Warning message.............................725

Adaptive Front-lighting System

(AFS) ........................................................215

Adaptive Variable Suspension

system (AVS)......................................290

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting

System)....................................................215

Air conditioning filter.......................... 666

Air conditioning system..................... 364

Air conditioning filter....................... 666

Front automatic air conditioning

system ..................................................364

Rear air conditioning system........379

S-FLOW mode..................................374

Airbags........................................................ 38

Airbag operating conditions .......... 46

Airbag precautions

for your child ......................................... 41

Airbag warning light .......................... 712

Correct driving posture....................30

Curtain shield airbag

operating conditions ....................... 46

Curtain shield airbag

precautions .......................................... 44

Front passenger occupant

classification system......................... 49

General airbag precautions ............. 41

Locations of airbags............................38

Modification and disposal

of airbags............................................... 45

Side airbag operating

conditions ............................................. 46

Side airbag precautions...................... 41

Side and curtain shield airbags

operating conditions ....................... 46

Side and curtain shield airbags

precautions ............................................41

SRS airbags .............................................38

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Alphabetical index

841

Alarm..............................................................81

Alarm............................................................ 81

Warning buzzer.......................... 711, 721

Anchor brackets...................................... 62

Antennas (smart access system

with push-button start)......................123

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).......289

Function ................................................. 289

Warning light .........................................712

Warning message.............................725

Approach warning (dynamic

radar cruise control)........................ 242

Armrest ....................................................593

Ashtrays....................................................585

Assist grips ..............................................598

Audio input.............................................. 497

Audio system..........................................386

Audio input............................................497

AUX port/

USB port.....................497, 477, 487

Bluetooth ®

audio.............................. 465

CD/DVD player................................433

CD/DVD player information......453

DVD video............................................. 441

iPod..........................................................485

MP3/WMA disc ...............................435

Optimal use ......................................... 495

Portable music player......................497

Radio ....................................................... 409

Rear seat audio controls ............... 498

Steering wheel audio switch .......503

USB memory.......................................475

Automatic headlight leveling

system......................................................216

Automatic light control system ........213

AUX port .................................................497

Auxiliary boxes .....................................580

AVS (Adaptive Variable

Suspension system) ......................... 290

B

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulbs .......................696

Wattage ...................................................791

Battery (12-volt battery).....................647

If the 12-volt battery is

discharged......................................... 770

Preparing and checking before

winter......................................................319

Warning light......................................... 712

Battery (traction battery)......................74

Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) ...............305

Bluetooth ®

Audio system.......................................465

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone) ...................... 506

Brake

Brake Hold .............................................210

Fluid ..........................................................645

Parking brake......................................207

Regenerative braking..........................72

Warning light.................................711, 714

Warning message............................... 721

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

842

Alphabetical index

Brake assist .............................................289

Brake Hold............................................... 210

Break-in tips..............................................173

Brightness control

Instrument panel light control...........91

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)................305

C

Care.................................................616, 620

Aluminum wheels ................................617

Exterior..................................................... 616

Interior .................................................... 620

Seat belts................................................. 621

Cargo capacity....................................... 186

Cargo hooks ........................................... 581

Caution label..............................................74

CD player................................................433

Chains .........................................................321

Child restraint system............................55

Booster seats, definition ....................55

Booster seats, installation..................65

Convertible seats, definition............55

Convertible seats, installation.........62

Front passenger occupant

classification system.........................49

Infant seats, definition..........................55

Infant seats, installation .......................62

Installing CRS

with LATCH anchors .....................60

Installing CRS with seat belts..........62

Installing CRS

with top tether strap.........................66

Child safety.................................................54

12-volt battery

precautions ........................... 649, 773

Airbag precautions................................ 41

Child restraint system.........................55

How your child should wear

the seat belt................................. 33, 35

Installing child restraints ....................59

Moon roof precautions ....................170

Power window lock switch.............164

Power window precautions...........166

Rear door child-protectors........... 138

Removed electronic

key battery precautions..............669

Seat belt comfort guide..................... 33

Seat belt extender precautions ......37

Seat belt precautions..........................58

Seat heater precautions.................592

Trunk precautions ...............................144

Child-protectors ....................................138

Cleaning ........................................ 616, 620

Aluminum wheels................................617

Exterior .....................................................616

Interior.....................................................620

Seat belts..................................................621

Clock......................................................... 584

Coat hooks ..............................................597

Condenser...............................................644

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Alphabetical index

843

Console box ............................................577

Console box light ..................................577

Consumption screen .............................113

Coolant..................................................... 642

Capacity .................................................787

Checking................................................642

Preparing and checking before

winter..................................................... 319

Cooling system ..................................... 642

Engine overheating........................... 774

Hybrid system overheating .......... 774

Cruise control

Cruise control......................................232

Dynamic radar cruise control......236

Cup holders............................................578

Curtain shield airbags ........................... 39

Customizable features.......................807

D

Daytime running light system............216

Defogger

Front windshield ...................................371

Outside rear view mirrors............ 384

Rear window ....................................... 384

Differential...............................................789

Dimensions ............................................. 782

Dinghy towing......................................... 188

Display

Dynamic radar cruise control .....236

LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).........255

Multi-information display.................. 94

Remote Touch screen ....................330

Trip information.....................................95

Warning message............................... 721

Do-it-yourself maintenance...............631

Door courtesy lights

Location ...................................................571

Wattage ...................................................791

Door lock

Doors.........................................................137

Smart access system with

push-button start................................121

Wireless remote control..................134

Doors .......................................................... 137

Automatic door locking

and unlocking system....................139

Door glasses..........................................164

Door lock.................................................137

Open door warning buzzer ..........125

Open door warning light ................714

Outside rear view mirrors ............... 161

Rear door child-protector ............. 138

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

844

Alphabetical index

Driver’s seat position memory......... 150

Driving.........................................................172

Break-in tips ...........................................173

Correct driving posture ....................30

Driving mode select switch ......... 286

Hybrid vehicle driving tips...............317

Procedures .............................................172

Winter drive tips.................................. 319

DVD player................................... 433, 441

Dynamic radar cruise control ......... 236

Function ..................................................236

Warning message................. 723, 734

E

Eco drive mode.....................................286

EDR (Event data recorder).................... 11

Electric motor (traction motor)......... 70

Electric Power Steering (EPS) .......289

Function ................................................. 289

Warning light .........................................712

Warning message.............................726

Electronic key ...........................................118

Battery-saving function.....................127

If the electronic key does not

operate properly.............................767

Replacing the battery......................668

Emergency, in case of

If the 12-volt battery is

discharged......................................... 770

If the electronic key

does not operate properly........ 767

If the hybrid system

will not start ....................................... 762

If the parking brake

cannot be released .......................765

If the shift lever

cannot be shifted from P............ 764

If the warning buzzer sounds..........711

If the warning light turns on..............711

If the warning message

is displayed.......................................... 721

If you have a flat tire.......................... 749

If you think something

is wrong ................................................710

If your vehicle becomes

stuck...................................................... 778

If your vehicle has to be stopped

in an emergency.............................703

If your vehicle needs

to be towed.......................................704

If your vehicle overheats.................774

Emergency flashers .............................702

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Alphabetical index

845

Energy monitor ........................................110

Engine

Accessory mode.................................190

Compartment......................................637

Engine switch........................................189

Hood........................................................634

How to start the hybrid system....189

Identification number .......................783

Ignition switch

(power switch)..................................189

Overheating......................................... 774

Power switch.........................................189

Engine compartment cover.............638

Engine coolant....................................... 642

Capacity .................................................787

Checking................................................642

Preparing and checking

before winter ..................................... 319

Engine coolant temperature

gauge ........................................................89

Engine oil .................................................639

Capacity ................................................ 785

Checking............................................... 639

Oil level warning message ...........733

Oil pressure

warning message........................... 722

Preparing and checking

before winter ..................................... 319

Engine oil maintenance data............624

Engine switch...........................................189

EPS

(Electronic Power Steering) ........ 289

Function..................................................289

Warning light......................................... 712

Warning message............................. 726

EV drive mode ........................................196

Event data recorder (EDR).....................11

F

First-aid kit storage net........................581

Flat tire.......................................................749

Floor mats................................................... 28

Fluid

Brake........................................................789

Hybrid transmission .........................788

Washer...................................................646

Fog lights....................................................218

Replacing light bulbs ...................... 689

Switch ........................................................218

Wattage ...................................................791

Footwell light............................................ 571

Front passenger occupant

classification system ............................49

Front personal lights ............................572

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

846

Alphabetical index

Front seats ................................................ 148

Adjustment.............................................148

Cleaning................................................ 620

Correct driving posture ....................30

Driving position memory................150

Head restraints.....................................155

Power easy access system ............ 153

Seat heaters .........................................590

Seat position memory.......................150

Seat ventilators.....................................591

Front side marker lights.......................213

Light switch.............................................213

Replacing light bulbs........................697

Welcome light illumination

control..................................................... 121

Front turn signal lights ........................205

Replacing light bulbs......................... 691

Turn signal lever ................................ 205

Wattage....................................................791

Fuel............................................................. 784

Capacity .................................................784

Fuel gauge................................................89

Information ............................................792

Refueling................................................. 227

Type ..............................................227, 784

Warning light .........................................714

Warning messages...........................737

Fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption...............96

Average fuel consumption

after refueling.......................................95

Current fuel consumption................95

Fuel filler door.........................................227

If the fuel filler door

cannot be opened.........................230

Refueling .................................................227

Fuses...........................................................670

G

Garage door opener..........................600

Gauges........................................................ 89

Glove box ................................................576

Glove box light.......................................576

H

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone)........................... 506

HD Radio ®

system................................414

Head restraints........................................155

Headlight cleaner .................................226

Headlights.................................................213

Adaptive Front-lighting

System (AFS).....................................215

Discharge headlights

precautions .......................................699

Headlight leveling

warning message............................724

Light switch.............................................213

Replacing light bulbs .......................697

Wattage ...................................................791

Headlights aim ...................................... 685

Head-up display .....................................102

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Alphabetical index

847

Heaters

Air conditioning system..................364

Heated steering wheel...................588

Seat heaters .........................................590

Outside rear view mirrors............ 384

High-voltage components ...................74

Hood.......................................................... 634

Open........................................................634

Warning message.............................728

Hooks

Cargo hooks.........................................581

Coat hooks ...........................................597

Luggage hook......................................581

Retaining hooks (floor mat).............28

Utility hook ........................................... 599

Horn.............................................................212

Hybrid battery (traction battery) .......74

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

air vents .................................................... 75

Hybrid system........................................... 70

Emergency shut off system..............75

Energy monitor/

consumption screen......................109

EV drive mode..................................... 196

High voltage components ............... 74

Hybrid System Indicator ...................92

Hybrid system precautions.............. 74

Hybrid vehicle driving tips...............317

If the hybrid system

will not start........................................762

Overheating......................................... 774

Power (ignition) switch....................189

Starting the hybrid system..............189

Vehicle proximity notification

system .......................................................71

Hybrid System Indicator .......................92

Hybrid transmission ..............................199

If the shift lever

cannot be shifted from P............ 764

Paddle shift switches..........................201

S mode....................................................202

I

I/M test..................................................... 630

Identification

Engine .....................................................783

Vehicle....................................................783

Ignition switch (power switch)..........189

Illuminated entry system ....................573

Immobilizer system .................................79

Indicators.....................................................87

Initialization

Maintenance ........................................ 624

Moon roof...............................................169

Power windows....................................165

Tire pressure

warning system...............................653

Initiators (tire pressure

warning system) ................................ 659

Inside door handle lights ..................... 571

Inside rear view mirror.........................159

Instrument panel light control..............91

Interior lights ............................................ 571

Intuitive parking assist ..........................261

Function....................................................261

Warning message..................723, 734

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

848

Alphabetical index

J

Jack

Positioning a floor jack................... 635

Vehicle-equipped jack .................. 750

Jack handle

................................................. 750

Jam protection function

Moon roof ..............................................168

Power trunk opener

and closer............................................ 143

Power windows...................................165

K

Keyless entry ............................................. 121

Smart access system

with push-button start..................... 121

Wireless remote control................. 134

Keys...............................................................118

Battery-Saving Function...................127

Electronic key .........................................118

Engine switch........................................189

If the electronic key

does not operate properly ........767

Key number plate .................................118

Keyless entry .................................121, 134

Mechanical key......................................118

Power switch.........................................189

Replacing the battery......................668

Warning buzzer.................................. 125

Wireless remote control key ........ 134

Knee airbags ............................................. 39

L

Language

(multi-information display)............... 98

LATCH anchors...................................... 60

Lever

Auxiliary catch lever.........................634

Hood lock release lever.................634

Internal trunk release lever .............144

Shift lever .................................................199

Turn signal lever.................................205

Wiper lever.............................................219

Lexus Enform

*

Lexus night view ...................................... 311

License plate lights ................................213

Light switch.............................................213

Replacing light bulbs .......................697

Welcome light

illumination control............................121

Light bulbs

Replacing.............................................. 689

Wattage ...................................................791

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Alphabetical index

849

Lights

Fog light switch .................................... 218

Headlight switch...................................213

Illuminated entry system.................573

Interior light...........................................572

Interior lights list................................... 571

Personal lights .....................................572

Replacing light bulbs.......................689

Trunk light............................................... 143

Turn signal lever ................................ 205

Vanity lights .........................................583

Wattage....................................................791

Welcome light illumination

control..................................................... 121

LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)...............251

Operation..............................................252

Warning

messages........ 724, 734, 735, 736

Load capacity.......................................... 186

Lock steering column...........................192

Low profile tire.......................................656

Luggage hook......................................... 581

Luggage security system.....................142

M

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance...........631

General maintenance.....................626

Maintenance data..............................782

Maintenance requirements..........623

Malfunction indicator lamp................ 712

Master warning light............................. 714

Meter............................................................ 89

Head-up display ..................................102

Indicators .................................................. 87

Instrument panel light control ..........91

Meters........................................................89

Multi-information display.................. 94

Warning lights........................................85

Micro dust and pollen filter...............374

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror......................159

Outside rear view mirror

defoggers...........................................384

Outside rear view mirrors ............... 161

Vanity mirrors .....................................583

Moon roof ................................................. 167

Door lock linked

moon roof operation..................... 168

Jam protection function................... 168

Operation................................................167

Warning message............................. 729

MP3 disc ................................................. 435

*

: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

850

Alphabetical index

Multi-information display..................... 94

Dynamic radar cruise control......236

Energy monitor......................................110

Lane-Keeping Assist....................... 255

Language..................................................98

Switching the display...........................95

Trip information .....................................95

Warning message...............................721

N

Navigation system

*

Noise from under vehicle ....................... 8

O

Odometer ..................................................89

Oil

Engine oil............................................... 785

Differential oil ...................................... 789

Opener

Hood........................................................634

Trunk ........................................................... 141

Outer foot lights

Outer foot lights .................................. 571

Wattage....................................................791

Outside rear view mirrors................... 161

Adjusting and folding ......................... 161

Blind spot monitor ............................305

Linked mirror function

when reversing..................................162

Mirror position memory ................. 150

Outside rear view

mirror defoggers............................384

Outside temperature display............. 95

Overheating............................................774

P

Paddle shift switches.............................201

Parking assist sensors

(intuitive parking assist)....................261

Parking brake .........................................207

If the parking brake

cannot be released .......................765

Operation.............................................. 207

Parking brake engaged

warning buzzer...............................730

Parking brake engaged

warning message...........................730

Parking lights ...........................................213

Light switch.............................................213

Replacing light bulbs .......................697

Welcome light

illumination control............................121

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Alphabetical index

851

PCS (Pre-Collision System)............ 296

Function ..................................................296

PCS OFF switch ................................297

Warning light .........................................713

Warning

message........................723, 735, 741

Personal lights........................................ 572

Power control unit ...................................74

Power control unit coolant............... 642

Capacity .................................................787

Checking................................................642

Preparing and checking before

winter..................................................... 319

Power easy access system ................ 153

Power outlets .........................................586

Power steering (Electric Power

Steering system)................................289

Warning light .........................................712

Warning message.............................726

Power switch........................................... 189

Power trunk opener and closer ........ 141

Power windows.......................................164

Door lock linked

window operation........................... 166

Jam protection function...................165

Operation............................................... 164

Window lock switch.......................... 164

Pre-Collision System (PCS).............296

Function..................................................296

PCS OFF switch................................ 297

Warning light.........................................713

Warning

message........................ 723, 735, 741

R

Radar cruise control (dynamic

radar cruise control).........................236

Radiator.....................................................644

Radio ......................................................... 409

RBDS (Radio Broadcast

Data Systems) ...................................... 412

Rear air conditioning system............379

Rear door sunshades.......................... 595

Rear personal lights .............................572

Rear side marker lights........................213

Light switch.............................................213

Replacing light bulbs .......................697

Welcome light

illumination control............................121

Rear seat heaters .................................590

Rear sunshade....................................... 594

Operation..............................................594

Reverse operation feature ............595

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

852

Alphabetical index

Rear turn signal lights .........................205

Replacing light bulbs....................... 695

Turn signal lever ................................ 205

Wattage....................................................791

Rear view mirror

Inside rear view mirror.....................159

Outside rear view mirrors................161

Rear view monitor system .................274

Rear window defoggers ....................384

Refueling ...................................................227

Capacity .................................................784

Fuel types...............................................784

If the fuel filler door

cannot be opened ........................ 230

Opening the fuel tank cap.............229

Regenerative braking.............................72

Remote Touch .......................................328

Remote Touch screen........................330

Replacing

Electronic key battery.....................668

Fuses........................................................ 670

Light bulbs............................................ 687

Tires ..........................................................749

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners...................................820

Reset the maintenance data ............ 624

Road accident cautions .........................77

S

Safety Connect ......................................607

Seat belts .....................................................32

Adjusting the seat belt........................ 33

Automatic Locking Retractor ........ 34

Child restraint system

installation ............................................. 62

Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belt.........................................621

Emergency Locking

Retractor................................................ 34

How to wear your seat belt..............32

How your child should wear

the seat belt..........................................35

Pre-collision seat belts....................... 34

Pregnant women, proper

seat belt use......................................... 36

Reminder light and buzzer.............714

Seat belt extender ................................35

Seat belt pretensioners...................... 34

SRS warning light ................................ 712

Seat heaters............................................590

Seat position memory ..........................150

Seat ventilators........................................591

Seating capacity .....................................186

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Alphabetical index

853

Seats............................................................ 148

Adjustment.............................................148

Adjustment precautions .................. 149

Child seats/child restraint

system installation..............................59

Cleaning................................................ 620

Driving position memory................150

Head restraints.....................................155

Power easy access system ............ 153

Properly sitting in the seat ................30

Seat heaters .........................................590

Seat position memory.......................150

Seat ventilators.....................................591

Sensor

Automatic headlight system.......... 216

Driver monitor sensor .................... 298

Humidity sensor .................................376

Inside rear view mirror.....................160

Intuitive parking assist....................... 261

Lexus night view.................................. 315

LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).........259

Radar sensor.................245, 298, 310

Rain-sensing windshield

wipers...................................................224

Service plug................................................74

Service reminder indicators ...............84

S-FLOW mode......................................374

Shift lever...................................................199

Hybrid transmission ...........................199

If the shift lever

cannot be shifted from P............ 764

Shift lever light......................................... 571

Shift lock system ....................................764

Side airbags................................................39

Side marker lights ..................................213

Light switch.............................................213

Replacing light bulbs .......................697

Welcome light illumination

control......................................................121

Side mirrors............................................... 161

Adjusting and folding ......................... 161

BSM (Blind spot monitor) ............305

Linked mirror function

when reversing..................................162

Mirror position memory ................. 150

Side turn signal lights.......................... 205

Replacing light bulbs .......................697

Turn signal lever.................................205

Smart access system

with push-button start.........................121

Antenna location..................................123

Entry functions ........................................121

Starting the hybrid system.............. 189

Warning message..............................727

Snow mode.............................................200

Snow tires................................................ 323

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

854

Alphabetical index

Spare tire.................................................. 749

Inflation pressure............................... 790

Storage location ................................ 750

Spark plug ............................................... 787

Specifications......................................... 782

Speedometer ............................................89

Sport mode .............................................286

Steering lock ............................................192

Column lock release......................... 193

Steering lock system

warning message........................... 747

Steering wheel........................................ 158

Adjustment.............................................158

Audio switches...................................503

Heated steering wheel...................588

Power easy access system ............ 153

Steering wheel

position memory..............................150

Stop lights

Replacing light bulbs........................697

Storage feature ..................................... 574

Stuck

If the vehicle becomes stuck........778

Sun shade

Rear.......................................................... 594

Rear door..............................................595

Roof............................................................168

Sun visors.................................................583

Switches

AFS OFF switch...................................215

Audio remote control

switches ..............................................503

Brake hold switch................................210

BSM (Blind spot monitor)

switch ...................................................305

Cruise control switch .......... 232, 236

“DISP” button..........................................95

Door lock switches.............................137

Driving mode select switch..........286

Driving position memory

switches ............................................... 150

Emergency flashers switch...........702

EV drive mode switch ......................196

Fog light switch.....................................218

Garage door opener

switches ............................................. 600

Headlight cleaner switch............... 226

Heated steering wheel

switch .................................................. 588

HUD (Head-up display)

switches ................................................102

Ignition switch....................................... 189

Intuitive parking assist........................261

Lexus night view switch......................311

Light switch.............................................213

LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)

switch ...................................................253

Moon roof switches ...........................167

Outside rear view mirror

switches ................................................. 161

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Alphabetical index

855

Paddle shift switches ......................... 201

Parking brake switches...................207

PCS OFF switch ................................297

Power door lock switch ...................137

Power switch.........................................189

Power window switches ................. 164

Rear sunshade switch..................... 594

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

switch................................................... 384

Seat heater switches........................590

Seat ventilator switches ...................591

Snow mode switch...........................200

“SOS” button....................................... 607

Talk switch............................................ 353

Telephone switches......................... 507

Tilt and telescopic

steering control switch .................158

Tire pressure warning reset

switch................................................... 654

Trunk closer switch.............................142

Trunk opener switch ........................... 141

Trunk opener main switch...............142

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

button ...................................................239

VSC OFF switch ................................ 291

Window lock switch.......................... 164

Windshield wipers

and washer switch .......................... 219

T

Tachometer ..................................... 89, 104

Tail lights ....................................................213

Light switch.............................................213

Replacing light bulbs .......................697

Welcome light illumination

control......................................................121

Talk switch............................................... 353

Telephone switches............................. 507

Theft deterrent system

Alarm............................................................81

Immobilizer system...............................79

Tire inflation pressure......................... 790

Maintenance data..............................790

Tire inflation pressure display

function....................................................97

Warning light.........................................715

Warning message.............................740

Tire information .....................................795

Glossary.................................................802

Size ...........................................................798

Tire identification number ............. 797

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading.............................................800

Tire pressure warning system......... 653

Function..................................................653

Initializing ...............................................653

Installing tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters................653

Registering ID codes.......................655

Tire pressure warning reset

switch ...................................................654

Warning light.........................................715

Warning message...................740, 741

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

856

Alphabetical index

Tires..............................................................651

Chains........................................................321

Checking.................................................651

If you have a flat tire ..........................749

Inflation pressure............................... 790

Information ............................................795

Replacing ...............................................749

Rotating tires ........................................652

Size........................................................... 790

Snow tires ..............................................323

Spare tire................................................749

Tire inflation pressure display

function...................................................97

Tire pressure warning system .... 653

Warning light ........................................ 715

Warning message.............................740

Tools...........................................................750

Top tether strap........................................ 66

Total load capacity................................ 186

Towing

Dinghy towing ......................................188

Emergency towing............................704

Towing eyelet...................................... 705

Trailer towing........................................ 187

TRAC (Traction Control).................289

Traction battery (hybrid battery) .......74

Traction motor (electric motor) ........ 70

Transmission.............................................199

Driving mode select switch ......... 286

Hybrid transmission........................... 199

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ...................................764

S mode....................................................202

Paddle shift switches ......................... 201

Trip information ....................................... 95

Trip meters................................................. 89

Trunk .............................................................141

Internal trunk release lever .............144

Jam protection function....................143

Luggage security system.................142

Open trunk warning message.... 729

Power trunk opener

and closer ..............................................141

Smart access system

with push-button start.................... 122

Trunk closer switch.............................142

Trunk easy closer ................................143

Trunk features....................................... 581

Trunk grip................................................142

Trunk light................................................143

Trunk opener main switch ..............142

Trunk opener switch............................141

Wireless remote control..................134

Trunk light

Trunk light................................................143

Wattage ...................................................791

Turn signal lights................................... 205

Replacing light bulbs ............691, 695

Turn signal lever.................................205

Wattage ...................................................791

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Alphabetical index

857

U

USB port ....................................... 477, 487

Utility hook..............................................599

V

Vanity lights

Vanity lights .........................................583

Wattage....................................................791

Vanity mirrors

...........................................583

VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics

Integrated Management)..............290

Vehicle data recordings.........................10

Vehicle Dynamics Integrated

Management (VDIM).....................290

Vehicle identification number.........783

Vehicle proximity notification

system .........................................................71

Vehicle Stability Control

(VSC).....................................................289

Ventilators (seat ventilators)............. 591

Voice command system....................353

VSC

(Vehicle Stability Control) ............289

W

Warning buzzers

Approach warning ........................... 242

Brake system ...........................................711

Downshifting........................................203

Intuitive parking assist........................261

Key reminder....................................... 744

No-handed driving warning........256

Open door ...........................................728

Open moon roof............................... 729

Open hood...........................................728

Open trunk........................................... 729

Open window..................................... 729

Pre-collision braking........................296

Seat belt reminder...............................714

Warning lights .......................................... 85

ABS ............................................................ 712

AFS OFF indicator .............................713

Brake hold operated

indicator................................................713

Brake system .................................711, 714

Charging system ................................. 712

Electric power steering .................... 712

Low fuel level.........................................714

Malfunction indicator lamp............. 712

Master warning light..........................714

Open door .............................................714

Parking brake indicator....................713

Pre-collision system...........................713

Seat belt reminder light ....................714

Slip indicator ..........................................713

SRS.............................................................. 712

Tire pressure..........................................715

Warning messages................................ 721

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

858

Alphabetical index

Warning reflector storage belt.......582

Washer .......................................................219

Checking............................................... 646

Low washer fluid

warning message...........................739

Preparing and checking

before winter ..................................... 319

Switch........................................................ 219

Washing and waxing.............................616

Weight

Cargo capacity....................................186

Load limits...............................................186

Weight.....................................................782

Welcome light illumination

control....................................................... 121

Wheels

Replacing wheels.............................. 664

Size........................................................... 790

Window glasses......................................164

Window lock switch..............................164

Windows....................................................164

Power windows................................... 164

Rear window defogger.................. 384

Windshield wiper de-icer .................385

Windshield wipers .................................219

Position....................................................322

Rain-sensing windshield

wipers.................................................... 219

Winter driving tips..................................319

Wireless remote control key.............134

Battery-Saving Function...................127

Locking/Unlocking............................ 134

Replacing the battery......................668

WMA disc...............................................435

X

XM ®

Satellite Radio.............................419

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Alphabetical index

859

860

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 634

Trunk opener

P. 141

Fuel filler door

P. 229

Hood lock release lever

P. 634

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

Fuel type

Cold tire inflation pressure

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill — reference)

Engine oil type

Tire inflation pressure

P. 790

17.5 gal. (66.3 L, 14.6 Imp.gal.)

Premium unleaded gasoline only

P. 227, 784

P. 790

With filter

Without filter qt. (L, Imp.qt.)

6.7 (6.3, 5.5)

6.2 (5.9, 5.2)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

P. 785

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents